15 CONNECTION HARDWARE 62073e PDF

GE Fanuc Automation
Computer Numerical Control Products
Series 15 / 150 – Model B
Connection Manual (Hardware)
GFZ-62073E/04 November 1998

GFL-001
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
as Used in this Publication
Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,
temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or
may be associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a
Warning notice is used.
Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.
Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and
operating the equipment.
This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts
have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all
details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in
connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein
which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes
no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.
GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory

with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or
usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for
purpose shall apply.
©Copyright 1998 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.
B–62073E/04 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the
machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety.
Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note
thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a danger of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.
` Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
s–1
B–62073E/04 Table of Contents
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–1
1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2. CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3. INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3.1 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.1.1 Cabinet Exterior Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.1.2 Installation Conditions of the CNC Inside Cabinet and Servo Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.2 POWER CAPACITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.3 CABINET DESIGN AND INSTALLATION CONDITIONS OF
THE MACHINE TOOL MAGNETIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3.4 THERMAL DESIGN OF THE CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.4.1 Temperature Rise within the Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.4.2 Cooling by Heat Exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.4.3 Heat Loss of Each Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.5 INSTALLING THE HEAT EXCHANGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3.5.1 Cooling Fin A/B/C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3.5.2 Heat Exchanger for CRT/MDI Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3.5.3 The Heat Pipe Type Heat Exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3.5.3.1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3.5.3.2 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.6 ACTION AGAINST NOISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3.6.1 Separating Signal Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3.6.2 Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.6.3 Grounding Each Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.6.4 Noise Suppressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.6.5 Cable Clamp and Shield Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3.7 CONTROL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
3.7.1 Configuration and Installation of the Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
3.7.2 Battery for Memory Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
3.7.3 Replacing the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3.8 CABLE LEAD–IN DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
3.8.1 Configuration of Control Unit Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
3.8.2 Cable Lead–in for Stand–alone Cabinet A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
3.8.3 Cable Lead–in for Stand–alone Cabinet B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
3.8.4 Cable Lead–in for Additional Cabinet A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
3.9 MAINTENANCE AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
3.9.1 Maintenance Area for Self–standing A Type Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
3.9.2 Maintenance Area for Self–standing B Type Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
3.9.3 Maintenance Area for Additional Cabinet A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
4. TOTAL CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
4.1 CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR SERIES 15–TB/TTB/MB/TFB/TTFB/MFB,
SERIES 150–TB/MB/TTB (IN CASE OF SERIAL SPINDLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
4.1.1 Connection Diagram for Series 15–TB/TTB/MB/TFB/TTFB/MFB, Series 150–TB/MB/TTB
(When LCD/MDI Unit with Built–in Graphic Functions is not Used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
4.1.2 Connection Diagram for Series 15–TB/TTB/MB
(When LCD/MDI Unit with Built–in Graphic Functions is Used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
c–1
TABLE OF CONTENTS B–62073E/04
4.2 CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR SERIES 15–TB/TTB/MB/TFB/TTFB/MFB,

SERIES 150–TB/MB/TTB (IN CASE OF ANALOG SPINDLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
4.3 CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR SERIES 15–MB OR SERIES 150–MB
(IN CASE OF MULTIPLE AXIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
4.3.1 Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
4.3.2 Additional Cabinet (In Case of Serial Spindle Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
4.3.3 Additional Cabinet (In Case of Analog Spindle Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
4.3.4 Connection Between the Control Unit and Additional Locker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
4.4 CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR SERIES 15–B (IN CASE OF MMC–II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
4.5 CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR SERIES 15–B (IN CASE OF MMC–III) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
4.6 CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR MMC–IV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND INPUT UNIT CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

5.1 POWER SUPPLY UNIT PANEL LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
5.2 CONNECTING THE POWER SUPPLY UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
5.2.1 When an Input Unit is not Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
5.2.2 When an Input Unit is Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
5.2.3 When AC Output Terminals for Which Power On/Off is Controlled are Insufficient . . . . . . . 103
5.2.4 Power ON Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
5.2.5 Power OFF Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
5.3 CONNECTION OF INPUT UNIT FOR STANDALONE CABINET A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
5.3.1 Input Unit Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
5.3.2 Connection to Input Units (A14B–0076–B004, –B005, and –B008) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
5.3.3 Connection to the Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
5.4 CONNECTION OF INPUT UNIT FOR STANDALONE CABINET B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
5.4.2 Connection to Input Unit (A14B–0076–B411) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
5.4.3 Connection to Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
5.5 CONNECTION OF INPUT UNIT FOR ADDITIONAL CABINET A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
5.5.2 Cable Connection
[Connection to the Input Unit (A02B–0075–J141, –J142, –J144, and –J145)] . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO MACHINE INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

6.1 OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
6.2 CONNECTION OF THE FANUC I/O LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
6.2.1 Connection of FANUC I/O Link by Electric Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
6.2.2 Connection of FANUC I/O Link by Optical Fiber Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
6.3 CONNECTION OF THE FANUC I/O UNIT–MODEL A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
6.3.1 Structure of FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
6.3.2 Outer Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
6.3.3 Mounting and Dismounting Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
6.3.4 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
6.3.5 Connecting Input Power Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
6.3.6 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
6.3.7 Connecting Signal Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
6.3.8 Connecting with I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
c–2
B–62073E/04 TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.3.9 Digital Input/Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

6.3.10 Correspondence between I/O Signals and Addresses in a Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
6.3.11 Number of I/O Points for I/O Unit–MODEL A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
6.4 CONNECTING THE CONNECTION UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
6.4.1 Connecting Connection Unit 1 and Connection Unit 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
6.4.2 Input Signal Regulations for the Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
6.4.3 Output Signal Regulations for the Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
6.4.4 Connector Pin Assignment for the Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
6.4.5 Details of the Connection between the Connection Unit and the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
6.4.6 External View of the Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
6.5 CONNECTION OF OPERATOR’S PANEL CONNECTION UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
6.5.1 Input Signal Regulations for the Operator’s Panel Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
6.5.2 Output Signal Regulations for the Operator’s Panel Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
6.5.3 Connector Layout for Operator’s Panel Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
6.5.4 Details of the Connection between the Operator’s Panel Connection Unit and the Machine . 181
6.5.5 External View of Operator’s Panel Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
6.6 CONNECTION OF SOURCE OUTPUT OPERATOR’S PANEL CONNECTION UNIT . . . . . . . 189
6.6.1 Source Output Operator’s Panel Connection Unit Input Signal Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
6.6.2 Output Signal Standard for Source Output Operator’s Panel Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
6.6.3 ALARM LEDs on Source Output Operator’s Panel Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
6.6.4 Connector Pin Assignment Addresses of Source Output
Operator’s Panel Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
6.6.5 Details of Machine Side Connections of Source Output Operator’s Panel Connection Unit . 199
6.6.6 External Dimensions of Source Output Operator’s Panel Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
6.7 ADDRESS–FIXED SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

7.1 CRT/MDI UNIT INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
7.1.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
7.1.2 9″ CRT or 9″ PDP Display Interface (CE Marking Non–compliant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
7.1.3 9″ CRT or PDP Display Interface (CE Marking Compliant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
7.1.4 14″ Analog CRT, 10.4″ LCD, 9.5″ LCD Display Interface
(CE Marking Compliant when MMC–IV is not Used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
7.1.5 14″ Analog CRT, 10.4″ LCD, 9.5″ LCD Display Interface
(CE Marking Compliant when MMC–IV is Used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
7.1.6 10.4″ LCD Display Interface (CE Marking Compliant with Built–in Graphic Function) . . . . 222
7.1.7 Adjusting the Flat Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
7.1.8 Interface between MMC–IV Board and Option 1 Board (Video Signal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
7.1.9 Keyboard Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
7.1.10 Small 9″ Keyboard Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
7.1.11 Interface between MMC–III Board and Option 1 Board (Video Signal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
7.2 I/O DEVICE INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
7.2.1 RS–232–C Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
7.2.2 PPR Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
7.2.3 Portable Tape Reader Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
7.2.4 FANUC Cassette Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
7.2.5 Connection with the FANUC Handy File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
7.2.6 Connection of Tape Reader Without Reels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
7.2.7 Connection of Tape Reader with Reels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
7.2.8 RS–422 Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
c–3
TABLE OF CONTENTS B–62073E/04
7.3 MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

7.4 REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE (RS–232–C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
7.5 REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE (RS–422) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
7.6 HIGH–SPEED DI SIGNAL INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
7.7 CONNECTION OF REFERENCE POSITION APPROACH SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
7.8 DNC INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
7.8.1 DNC1 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
7.8.2 DNC2 Interface (RS–232–C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
7.8.3 DNC2 Interface (RS422) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
7.9 SPINDLE INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
7.9.1 Serial Spindle Interface (S Series Spindle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
7.9.2 Serial Spindle Interface (α Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
7.9.3 Analog Spindle Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
7.9.4 Pulse Coder Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
7.10 SERVO INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
7.10.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
7.10.2 Servo Amp Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
7.10.3 Serial Pulse Coder Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
7.10.4 Linear Scale Interface (A/B/Z Signal Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
7.10.5 Linear Scale Interface (Serial Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
7.10.6 APC Battery Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
7.10.7 Hybrid–control Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
7.11 GENERAL–PURPOSE ANALOG VOLTAGE INPUT INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
7.12 CONNECTION BETWEEN THE SERIES 15–B (MMC–II) AND PERIPHERAL UNITS . . . . . . 275
7.13 CONNECTION WITH AN EXTERNAL DEVICE USING THE RS–422 INTERFACE
FOR SERIES 15–B (MMC–II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
7.14 CONNECTION WITH A PRINTER USING THE CENTRONICS INTERFACE
FOR FANUC SERIES 15–B (MMC–II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
7.15 CONNECTION WITH AN EXTENSION ADAPTOR UNIT
FOR FANUC SERIES 15–B (MMC–II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
7.16 CONNECTION WITH A HARD DISK UNIT FOR FANUC SERIES 15–B (MMC–II) . . . . . . . . 283
7.17 CONNECTION WITH A FLOPPY DISK UNIT FOR FANUC SERIES 15–B (MMC–II) . . . . . . . 287
7.18 RS–232–C SERIAL PORT (MMC–III) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
7.19 OUTER HARD DISK INTERFACE (MMC–III) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
8. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
APPENDIX
A. LIST OF EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
C. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
D. ATTACHING THE CRT PROTECTIVE COVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
c–4
B–62073E/04 1. GENERAL
1 GENERAL
Contents of this manual This manual describes the electrical and structural specifications required
for connecting the CNC control units, FANUC Series 15–MODEL
B/Series 150–MODEL B, with a machine tool, and covers the equipment
shown in the configuration diagram in Chapter 2. When using the CNC
control units, be sure to connect and install them following the
instructions in this manual. The manual outlines the units commonly used
for Fanuc CNC control units, that is, the I/O unit, servo motor, spindle
motor, and so on, and describes additional information on using these
units for the Series 15/150–B. Refer to individual manuals for the
detailed specifications of each unit.
Multiple models of Series 15/150–B products are provided so that they
correspond to various machine tools (lathe, machining center, etc.),
respectively. The description in this manual is common to these models.
Whenever each model has different restrictions, the abbreviation of the
model and notes are described. See the following table for the names and
abbreviations of the models described in this manual.
How this manual is This manual comprises the following chapters and appendix.
organized
1. GENERAL
This chapter. It describes the outline and organization of this manual,
names of models applied and other related manuals.
2. CONFIGURATION
This chapter describes the configuration of the electrical system of the
machine tool with which the CNC is used.
3. INSTALLATION
This chapter describes how to install the CNC.
4. TOTAL CONNECTION
This chapter shows the connection diagrams for the CNC and each
device.
5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND INPUT UNIT CONNECTION

This chapter describes the connection of the CNC to the power supply
unit and input unit.
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO MACHINE INTERFACE

This chapter describes the connection of the CNC to the I/O unit to
machine interface.
1
1. GENERAL B–62073E/04
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

This chapter describes the connection of the CNC to peripherals.
APPENDIX
This appendix contains an explanation of the CNC control unit,
external dimensions of the display apparatus and details on the 20–pin
interface connectors and cables.
Applicable models This manual can be used with the following models.
The abbreviated names may be used.
Product Name Abbreviations
FANUC Series 15–TB 15–TB
FANUC Series 15–TFB 15–TFB
FANUC Series 15TED–MODEL B–4 (*1) 15TED
FANUC Series 15TEE–MODEL B–4 (*1) 15TEE
FANUC Series 15TEF–MODEL B–4 (*1) 15TEF
FANUC Series 15–MB 15–MB Series 15–B
FANUC Series 15–MFB 15–MFB
FANUC Series 15MEK–MODEL B–4 (*1) 15MEK
FANUC Series 15MEL–MODEL B–4 (*1) 15MEL
FANUC Series 15–TTB 15–TTB
FANUC Series 15–TTFB 15–TTFB
FANUC Series 150–TB 150–TB
FANUC Series 150–TTB 150–TTB Series 150–B
FANUC Series 150–MB 150–MB
(*1) With 15TED, 15TEE, and 15TEF, some options are not available.
Moreover, the following PC boards cannot be used:
D Sub–CPU board
D RISC board
D OSI ethernet board
(*2) The MMC board can be used only with the Series 150.
(*3) See FANUC MMC-IV Connection and Maintenance Manual
(B-62493E) for connection related to MMC-IV.
2
B–62073E/04 1. GENERAL
Manuals related to Manuals related to FANUC Series 15/150–MODEL B are as follows.

Series 15/150–MODEL B This manual is marked with an asterisk (*).
List of manuals related to Series 15/150–MODEL B

Specification
Manual Name
Number
FANUC Series 15–TB/TFB/TTB/TTFB DESCRIPTIONS B–62072E
FANUC Series 15/150–MODEL B For Machining Center DESCRIPTIONS B–62082E
FANUC Series 15/150–MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL B–62073E *
FANUC Series 15/150–MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL (BMI Interface) B–62073E–1
FANUC Series 15–MODEL B For Lathe OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Programming) B–62554E
FANUC Series 15–MODEL B For Lathe OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Operation) B–62554E–1
FANUC Series 15/150–MODEL B For Machining Center OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Programming) B–62564E
FANUC Series 15/150–MODEL B For Machining Center OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Operation) B–62564E–1
FANUC Series 15/150–MODEL B PARAMETER MANUAL B–62560E
FANUC Series 15/150–MODEL B MAINTENANCE MANUAL B–62075E
FANUC Series 15–MODEL B DESCRIPTIONS (Supplement for Remote Buffer) B–62072E–1
FANUC Series 15–MODEL B PROGRAMMING MANUAL (Macro Compiler / Macro Executer) B–62073E–2
PMC
FANUC PMC–MODEL N/NA PROGRAMMING MANUAL (Ladder Language) B–61013E
FANUC PMC–MODEL NB/NB2 PROGRAMMING MANUAL (Ladder Language) B–61863E
FANUC PMC–MODEL N/NA PROGRAMMING MANUAL (C Language) B–61013E–2
FANUC PMC–MODEL NB PROGRAMMING MANUAL (C Language) B–61863E–1
FANUC PMC–MODEL N/NA
B–61013E–4
PROGRAMMING MANUAL (C Language – Tool Management Library)
Conversational Automatic Programming Function
CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR MACHINING CENTER
B–61263E
(Series 15–MF/MFB) PROGRAMMING MANUAL
CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR MACHINING CENTER
B–61264E
(Series 15–MF/MFB) OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR LATHE
B–61234E
(Series 15–TF/TTF/TFB/TTFB) OPERATOR’S MANUAL
CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION II FOR LATHE
B–61804E–2
(Series 15–TFB/TTFB) OPERATOR’S MANUAL
Tracing / Digitizing
FANUC Series 15–MB DESCRIPTIONS (Supplement for Tracing / Digitizing) B–62472E
FANUC Series 15–MB CONNECTION MANUAL (Supplement for Tracing / Digitizing) B–62473E
FANUC Series 15–MB OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Supplement for Tracing / Digitizing) B–62474E
Gas, Laser Plasma Cutting Machine
FANUC Series 15–MB DESCRIPTIONS (FOR GAS, LASER PLASMA CUTTING MACHINE) B–62082EN–1
Multi–Teaching Function
FANUC Series 15–MB CONNECTION MANUAL (Multi–Teaching Function) B–62083E–1
Multiple–axis and Multiple–path Control Function
FANUC Series 15–TTB OPERATOR’S MANUAL
B–62074E–1
(Supplement Explanations for Multiple–axis and Multiple–path Control Function)
3
2. CONFIGURATION B–62073E/04
2 CONFIGURATION
The following figure (see next page) shows the configuration of the
electrical system of the machine tool with which the Series 15–B is used.
This manual describes how to connect the units illustrated in this diagram.
The machine tool body, machine operator’s panel, power magnetic
circuit, and sensor/actuator are specific to the machine tool and are the
builder’s responsibility. This manual does not cover the internal
connection of these units to the machine tool.
The numbers in parentheses shown in the diagram are section references
for this manual.
4
B–62073E/04 2. CONFIGURATION
(6.4, 6.5, 6.6)
(6.2, 6.3,
6.4, 6.7)
(7.10)
(7.9)
NOTE
1 Refer to the “FANUC I/O Unit–Model A Connecting Maintenance Manual (B–61813E).” or the
“FANUC I/O Unit–Model B Connecting Manual (B–62163E).”
2 Refer to the “FANUC AC Servo Motor α series Descriptions (B–65142E).”
3 Refer to the “FANUC AC Spindle Motor α series Descriptions (B–65152E).”
5
3. INSTALLATION B–62073E/04
3 INSTALLATION
6
B–62073E/04 3. INSTALLATION
3.1
ENVIRONMENTAL
REQUIREMENTS
3.1.1 The peripheral units, such as the control unit and CRT/MDI, have been
Cabinet Exterior designed on the assumption that they are housed in closed cabinets. In
this manual “cabinet” refers to the following:
Environmental
(1) Cabinet manufactured by the machine tool builder for housing the
Requirements
control unit or peripheral units;
(2) Cabinet for housing the flexible turnkey system provided by FANUC;
(3) Operation pendant, manufactured by the machine tool builder, for
housing the CRT/MDI unit or operator’s panel ; or
(4) Equivalent to the above.
The environmental conditions when installing these cabinets shall
conform to the following table. Section 3.3 describes the installation and
design conditions of a cabinet satisfying these conditions.
When a PCB When a PCB
with internal with internal
Conditions
hard disk is not hard disk is
mounted mounted
In operation 0°C to 45°C 5°C to 40°C

Ambient
temperature In storage or
around cabinet –20°C to 60°C
transportation
Change in 1.1°C/minute 0.3°C/minute

temperature max. max.
Relative humidity Relative humidity

75% or less, no 10 to 75%, no
Normal
condensation condensation
allowed allowed
Humidity
Relative humidity Relative humidity
Temporary
95% or less, no 10 to 90%, no
(within one
condensation condensation
month)
allowed allowed
In operation 0.5 G or less

Vibration In storage or
1.0 G or less
transportation
Normal machine shop environment

(The environment must be
considered if the cabinets are in a
Environment
location where the concentration of
dust, coolant, and/or organic solvent
is relatively high.)
7
3.1.2
Installation Conditions Ambient In operation: 0 to 55°C
of the CNC Inside temperature (when a PCB with internal hard disk is not mounted)
In operation: 5 to 50°C
Cabinet and Servo Unit (when a PCB with internal hard disk is mounted)
In storage and transportation: –20 to 60°C
Humidity Relative humidity: 95% or less, no condensation allowed

(when a PCB with internal hard disk is not mounted)
Relative humidity: 75% or less, no condensation allowed
(when a PCB with internal hard disk is mounted)
Vibration In operation: 0.5 G or less
Environment Coolant, lubricants and chips must not splash these units.
8
3.2 The power capacity of the CNC control unit, which in this section means
the specification required for the power supply, is obtained by adding the
POWER CAPACITY power capacity of the control section and the power capacity of the servo
section.
The power capacity of the control section includes the power capacity of
the control unit, CRT/MDI, I/O unit, and operator’s panel interface.
When power supply Al is used. 0.4 KVA
Power capacity
ca acity of the
control section When power supply BI is used. 1 KVA
Power capacity of the

Depends on servo motor type.
servo section
9
3.3 When a cabinet is designed, it must satisfy the environmental conditions

described in Section 3.1. In addition, the magnetic interference on the
CABINET DESIGN CRT screen, noise resistance, and maintenance requirements must be
AND INSTALLATION considered. The cabinet is design must meet the following conditions :
CONDITIONS OF THE (1) The cabinet must be fully closed.
MACHINE TOOL The cabinet must be designed to prevent the entry of airborne dust,
coolant, and organic solvent.
MAGNETIC
(2) The cabinet must be designed to maintain a difference in temperature
of 10°C or less between the air in the cabinet and the outside air as the
temperature in the cabinet increases.
See Section 3.4 for the details on thermal design of the cabinet.
(3) A closed cabinet must be equipped with a fan to circulate the air
within.
The fan must be adjusted so that the air moves at 0.5 m/sec along the
surface of each installed unit.
Caution: If the air blows directly from the fan to the unit, dust easily
abheres to the unit. This may cause the unit to fail.
(4) For the air to move easily, a clearance of 100 mm is required between
each unit and the wall of the cabinet.
(5) Packing materials must be used for the cable port and the door in
oreder to seal the cabinet.
Because the CRT unit uses a voltage of approximatery 11 KV to 20
KV, airborne dust gathers easily. If the cabinet is insufficiently sealed,
dust passes through the gap and abheres to the unit. This may cause
the insulation of the unit to deteriorate.
Acceptable packing materials:
D Epton sealer No. 686, Nitto Industry Co., Ltd.
D Polyurethane foam (ester) covered with vinyl chloride, Fuji
Rubber Co., Ltd.
(6) The CRT/MDI unit must be installed in a location where coolant
cannot be poured directly on it. The unit does have a dust–proof front
panel.
The front panel of the CRT/MDI unit is dust–proof. However, we do
not recommend installing the CRT/MDI unit in locations where
coolant directly splashes the front panel. Also, high–voltage is used
in the internal circuits of the CRT/MDI unit. Coolant entering the
CRT/MDI unit might cause serious trouble. The operation pendant
containing the cabinet and CRT/MDI unit is completely sealed, and
designed to prevent dirt, dust and coolant from entering. Pay particular
attention to preventing dust entering the CRT/MDI unit.
(7) Noise must be minimized.
As the machine and the CNC unit are reduced in size, the parts that
generate noise may be placed near noise–sensitive parts in the
magnetics cabinet.
The CNC unit is built to protect it from external noise. Cabinet design
to minimize noise generation and to prevent it from being transmitted
to the CNC unit is necessary. See section 3.6 for details of noise
elimination/management.
(8) The units must be installed or arranged in the cabinet so that they are
easy to inspect and maintain.
10
(9) The CRT screen can be distorted by magnetic interference.

Arranging magnetic sources must be done with care.
If magnetic sources (such as transformers, fan motors,
electromagnetic contactors, solenoids, and relays) are located near the
CRT display, they frequently distort the display screen. To prevent
this, the CRT display and the magnetic sources generatlly must be kept
300 mm apart. If the CRT display and the magnetic sources are not
300 mm apart, the screen distortion may be suppressed by changing
the direction in which the magnetic sources are installed.
The magnetic intensity is not constant, and it is often increased by
magnetic interference from multiple magnetic sources interacting
with each other. As a result, simply keeping the CRT and the magnetic
sources 300 mm apart may not be enough to prevent the distortion.
If they cannot be kept apart, or if the CRT screen remains distorted
despite the distance, it may be necessary to cover the screen with a
magnetic shield.
(10) The installation conditions of the I/O unit must be satisfied.
To obtain good ventilation in the module, the I/O unit must be installed
in the direction shown in the following figure. Clearances of 100 mm
or more both above and below the I/O unit are required for wiring and
ventilation.
Equipment radiating too much heat must not be put below the I/O unit.
Top
I/O base unit
(No screws or protrusions shall extend
from the bottom of this unit.)
Bottom
(11) If the CNC unit is installed at an elevation exceeding 1000 m, the upper
limit temperature of the CNC inside the cabinet at the environmental
conditions described in section 3.1 is subject to restrictions.
With each increase of 100 m above an elevation of 100 m, the upper
limit temperature is reduced by 1°C.
Example) When the CNC unit is installed at an elevation of 1750 m,
the allowable upper limit temperature of the CNC inside
the cabinet is calculated as follows:
55°C–1750/100 1.0°C+ 47.5°C
Accordingly the allowable temperature range is 0°C to
47.5°C
When a PCB with built–in hard disk is used, the installation elevation
is restricted as follows:
Standard elevation when in operation: –60 to 3,000 m
Standard elevation when not in operation: –60 to 12,000 m
(12) In unspecified frequencies, the CNC control unit or the hard disk itself
may resonate. If this happens, resonation may cause acceleration
beyond the allowable limits of the devices. Full check this after
installing the CNC control unit in the machine tool.
11
NOTE
When a PCB with built–in hard disk is used, erroneous
operation or unexpected accidents may damage the data
stored on the hard disk even if the PCB is used under the
correct environment. To be extra sure, back up important
data from the hard disk.
If the power is turned OFF or a power interruption occurs
during accessing of the hard disk or while the operating
system is still running, data on the hard disk is more likely
to be damaged. Avoid this at all costs. Also, instruct the end
user to pay attention to this.
12
3.4 The purpose of the thermal design of the cabinet is to limit the difference
in temperature between the air in the cabinet and the outside air to 10°C
THERMAL DESIGN or less when the temperature in the cabinet increases.
OF THE CABINET The internal air temperature of the cabinet increases when the units and
parts installed in the cabinet generate heat. Since the generated heat is
radiated from the surface of the cabinet, the temperature of the air in the
cabinet and the outside air balance at certain heat levels. If the amount
of heat generated is constant, the larger the surface area of the cabinet, the
less the internal temperature rises. The thermal design of the cabinet
refers to calculating the heat generated in the cabinet, evaluating the
surface area of the cabinet, and enlarging that surface area by installing
heat exchangers in the cabinet, if necessary. Such a design method is
described in the following subsections.
3.4.1 The cooling capacity of a cabinet made of sheet metal is generally 6 W/°C
per 1 m2 surface area, that is, when the 6 W heat source is contained in
Temperature Rise
a cabinet having a surface area of 1 m2, the temperature of the air in the
within the Cabinet cabinet rises by 1°C. In this case the surface area of the cabinet refers to
the area useful in cooling , that is, the area obtained by subtracting the area
of the cabinet touching the floor from the total surface area of the cabinet.
There are two preconditions : The air in the cabinet must be circuited by
the fun, and the temperature of the air in the cabinet must be almost
constant.
To calculate the increase in temperature inside the cabinet, the heat loss
of the units to be installed must be checked. Section 3.4.3 lists the heat
losses of the units provided by FANUC. The heat loss of all other parts
in the cabinet must also be added. Let the obtained total heat loss be P
[W].
The following expression must then be satisfied to limit the difference in
temperature between the air in the cabinet and the outside air to 10°C or
less as the temperature in the cabinet rises:
Internal heat loss P [W]x 6 [W/m2·°C] surface area S [m2]
10 [°C] of rise in temperature
For example, a cabinet having a surface area of 4 m2 has a cooling capacity
of 24 W/°C. To limit the internal temperature increase to 10°C under
these conditions, the internal heat must not exceed 240 W. If the actual
internal heat is 320 W, however, the temperature in the cabinet rises by
13°C or more. When this happens, the cooling capacity of the cabinet
must be improved using the heat exchanger described next.
3.4.2 If the temperature rise cannot be limited to 10°C by the cooling capacity
of the cabinet, a heat exchanger must be added. The heat exchanger
Cooling by Heat
forcibly applies the air from both the inside and outside of the cabinet to
Exchanger the cooling fin to obtain effective cooling. The heat exchanger enlarges
the surface area. Section 3.5 explains five heat exchangers supplied by
FANUC. Select one of these according to the application.
If cooling fin A is used for the cabinet, the total cooling capacity of a
cabinet having a surface area of 4 m2 in the example above is improved
as follows:
13
6 W/m2/°C 4 m2) 9.1 W/°C+ 33.1 W/°C
The calculated value verifies that even if the internal heat is 320 W, the
temperature rise can be limited to less than 10°C.
See Section 3.5 for installing the heat exchanger.
3.4.3
Heat Loss of Each Unit
Heat
Name Remarks
loss
Control unit Basic unit (4 slots) 60W Power supply AI
Basic unit (4 slots) 80W Power supply BI
Main CPU board 20W
PMC board 18W
Sub board 18W
Option 1 board 15W
RISC Board 18W Cannot be used on

15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL
Buffer board (Multiple axis) 6W
AXES CPU (Multiple axis) 15W
MMC–II CPU board 20W Can be used only on series 150–B
MMC–II Graphic board 20W Can be used only on series 150–B
MMC–III CPU board 20W Can be used only on series 150–B
MMC–IV CPU board 15W Can be used only on series 150–B
OSI/Ethernet board 18W Cannot be used on

15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL
Data server board 18W
HSSB interface board 3W Can be used only on series 150–B
CRT/MDI 9″ monochrome CRT/MDI 14W For both small and standard type
9″ color CRT/MDI 38W For both small and standard type
9″ monochrome PDP/MDI 20W For both small and standard type
10.4″ color LCD/MDI 20W For both graphic function built–in type and MMC–IV
9.5″ color LCD/MDI 20W
14″ color CRT/MDI 70W
9.5″ LCD (monochrome STN) 10W
14
Heat
Name Remarks
loss
Connection unit Connection unit 1 35W
Connection unit 1+2 60W
Operator’s Operator’s panel connection unit 30W

panel
I/O unit AIF01A, AIF01B 1.2W

model A
AID32A, AID32B 1.2W) 0.23W number of ON points
AID16A, AID16B 0.1W) 0.21W number of ON points
AID32E, AID32F 0.1W) 0.23W number of ON points
I/O unit BIF04A1 1.6W

model B
AIF02C 1.2W
BID16A1, BID16B1 1.5W) 0.23 number of ON input points
BID16P1, BID16Q1 0.6W) 0.23 number of ON input points
BOA12A1 0.9W) (0.09 1.1 IL2) number of ON output points
BOD16A1 1.0W) (0.13+0.3 IL2) number of ON output points
BOD16P1 0.3W) (0.13+0.3 IL2) number of ON output points
BIA16P1 0.1W) 0.21 number of ON input points
BMD88A1, BMD88B1 1.3W) 0.23 number of ON input points)

(0.13) 0.3 IL2) number of ON output points
IL: load current BMD88P1, BMD88Q1 0.4W) 0.23 number of ON input points)
of output (0.13) 0.3 IL2) number of ON output points
MMC–II Hard disk unit 26W
Panel mount type 3.5″ floppy disk 3W

unit
Portable type 3.5″ floppy disk unit 12W
Portable type 5.25″ floppy disk unit 26W
Full–key board unit 2W
Extention adapter unit 7W
Portable cassette streamer unit 24W
Multi–tap transformer 51W
See FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER α series DESCRIPTIONS

(B–65162E) for heat loss of servo amplifier.
15
3.5 Table 3.5 lists the heat exchangers.

Cooling fins A, B and C are not provided with a fan. Note that a fan motor
INSTALLING THE is required for any of these cooling fins when it is used as a heat exchanger.
HEAT EXCHANGER Table 3.5 List of heat exchangers
Ordering Cooling
Name Size
specification capacity
Cooling fin A A02B–0053–K303 9.1 W/°C 196 90 1000 mm
Cooling fin B A02B–0053–K304 10.1 W/°C 444 90 650 mm
Cooling fin C A02B–0053–K305 25.2 W/°C 560 90 970 mm
Heat exchanger for A02B–0060–K401 5.0 W/°C 390 86 480 mm

CRT/MDI unit
Heat pipe type heat A02B–0094–C901 9.0 W/°C 226 132 415 mm
exchanger
3.5.1 The cooling fin is shown below (Fig. 3.5.1 (a)). It is installed in a cabinet
Cooling Fin A/B/C made by the machine tool builder.
Viewed from cabinet mounting side
Fig. 3.5.1 (a) External view of cooling fin
16
Cabinet
Cooling fin
Inside air
flow
Outside air
flow
Fig. 3.5.1 (b) Internal view of cooling fin
The cooling fin can be installed in two ways, as shown in Fig. 3.5.1 (b).
The following lists the general precautions to be observed when using the
cooling fins :
1) The fans are not included with the cooling fin. They should be
provided by the machine tool builder.
2) Bring in the outside air from the bottom and exhaust the hot air from
the top.
3) The inside air may flow from top to bottom or bottom to top. However,
generally decide the direction as follows :
a) Bring in the air near high heat loss components.
b) Exhaust the air toward the most important components to be
cooled.
4) For the cooling fin to display the specified cooling capacity, the air
inside the cooling fins must flow at a velocity of 2.5 m/sec or greater.
(velocity of air flow measurement)
Set the slit to the intake side and

measure the velocity at the slit.
5) Generally, install the cooling fins to the door. But be sure that the door
does not bend when installing the cooling fin. The cooling fins are
equipped with packing.
17
External dimensions
Fan mounting
plate
Terminal
block for fan
motor G–04
(Attached to
the cooling fins. Cooling fins
Mounting metals Its height is 20
for cooling fins mm)
4–M4
Mounting screw Fan motor
Mounting metal
for cooling fins
4–M4 Mounting metal

Mounting screw Mounting plate for cooling fins
for fan mounting plate for fan motor (sheet metal
Door about 3 mm
thick).
Mounting diagram (example)
Panel cut drawing
Fig. 3.5.1 (c) External dimension mounting method of cooling fin A (A02B–0053–K303)
NOTE
1 Fan motor, mounting plate for fan motor and mounting metal
for cooling fins are not attached to the cooling fins.
So, prepare them at the machine tool builder.
2 Use two fan motors with about 50 W power.
3 Weight: 6.5 kg
18
External dimensions
Mounting stud for cooling fins
(2 studs are attached top and bottom)
Mounting
hole for fan
motor
Fan motor Cooling fins
6–6 dia.
Mounting hole
Mounting
Mounting hole plate for fan
for fan motor motor
4–M4 Terminal block for fan motor G–04 Door
(Attached to the cooling fins.
4–M4 Its height is 20 mm)
(Mounting hole Mounting diagram (example)
for fan motor)
Hole
External shape of
cooling fins.
Hole
6–6 dia hole or

M5 stud bolt
Stud hole
(Make a hole 5 dia
for fan motor) Panel cut drawing
Fig. 3.5.1 (d) External dimension mounting method of cooling fin B (A02B–0053–K304)
NOTE
1 Fan motor and mounting plate are not attached to the
cooling fins. So, prepare them, at the machine tool builder.
2 Use four fan motors with about 20 W power.
3 Weight: 7.5 kg
19
External dimensions Mounting stud for cooling fins

(Attached to the cooling fins)
Mounting plate
for fan motor
Terminal block
for fan motor
G–04
Cooling fins
(Attached to
the cooling
Fan motor
fins.Its height
is 20 mm)
6–M4
8–6 dia.
Mounting hole Mounting
Mounting hole
for fan motor plate for fan
5–M4 motor
(Mounting hole
for fan motor) Door
Mounting diagram (example)

External shape
of cooling fins.
(This hole com-

bines mounting
hole and stud
6–6 dia hole or hole.)
M5 stud bolt
Panel cut diagram
Fig. 3.5.1 (e) External dimension and mounting method of cooling fin C (A02B–0053–K305)
NOTE
1 Fan motor and mounting plate for fan motor are not
attached to the cooling fins. Prepare them at the machine
tool builder.
2 Use two fan motors with about 40 W power.
3 Weight: 13.5 kg
20
3.5.2
Heat Exchanger for
CRT/MDI Unit
hole
Lot
No.
Weight: 0.65 kg
External Dimensions of External Dimensions of External
Finger Guard Cooling Fan
Air inlet
Packing
Power terminal
M4 screw
AC200 V 50 Hz
AC200 V/220 V
60 Hz
48 W
Air outlet
Cooling fin: About 6 kg

Connector for external (Excluding attached parts)
cooling fan
Fig. 3.5.2 (a) External dimensions of external cooling fan and cooling unit for CRT/MDI (A02B–0060–K401)
NOTE
External cooling fan and finger guard are attached beside
cooling fin.
21
Heat exchanger
Outside Inside
Air outlet
Air outlet
Main body
of heat
exchanger
(1)
Air inlet
Prepare mounting
screws and mount-
ing panel. External cooling fan (attached)
Finger guard (attached)
(1) Use M5 screws to mount the heat exchanger.

(2) Be careful with air flow when securing the external cooling fan.
(3) Prepare a mounting panel for external cooling fan and install
the panel where it can be exchanged externally.
(4) Drill mounting holes for external cooling fan and air outlet
on heat exchanger mounting panel.
Fig. 3.5.2 (b) Mounting methods of heat exchanger for CRT/MDI
22
Horizontal type CRT/MDI

Horizontal type CRT/MDI only and machine operator’s panel Vertical type CRT/MDI only
Inside Outside
Side view
CRT/MDI Heat exchanger
Min Min Min

370 35 370 35 35
370
Top view
Refer to these figures for allocation of CRT/MDI and heat exchanger.
Fig. 3.5.2 (c) Allocation of 14″ color CRT/MDI and heat exchanger
23
3.5.3
The Heat Pipe Type
Heat Exchanger
3.5.3.1 The heat pipe type heat exchanger is used for cooling the airtight cabinet
Installation of small sized electronic devices. It is a compact, lightweight, and
heat–efficient unit. Because the fan is built–in, it is used simply by
installing it, performing the “panel cut” operation.
(1) Specifications
Installation format Installation type in board
Fan Cooling ability 9 (50 Hz when operating)

specifications (W/°C)
Voltage (V) 200 VAC
Frequency (Hz) 50 60
Rating current (A) 0.28 0.24
Rating input (W) 28 26
Weight (kg) 4
Color Munsell signal N1.5
D Order specifications Heat exchanger A02B–0094–C901
Remarks
D A filter is installed on the outside air inhalation side.
D The installation board thickness is the standard 1.6 t.
D When a fan motor and filter are necessary for maintenance, prepare
them separately.
Fan motor specifications A90L–0001–0219#A
Filter specifications A250–0689–X004
D If the heat exchanger is installed near the CRT, screen distortion may
occur due to magnetic flux leakage from the fan motor.
24
(2) External dimensions
Power source AIR FLOW

terminal M4
External fan unit

Earth terminal
M4
Internal fan unit
AIR FLOW
(Installation board thickness)
Fig. 3.5.3.1 (a) External dimensions diagram of heat pipe type heat transformer
25
(3) Panel cut dimensions
180
2.5
187.5
190
HOLE
175
190
3–f 5
6–f 6 or stud welder (M4)
214
Fig. 3.5.3.1 (b) External dimensions diagram of panel cut
(4) Installation method

Please install the heater exchanger by the following sequence:
Heat exchanger
main unit
Fan power cable
(detach the connector)
External fan unit
Earth cable Installation screws A (2)

Installation screw B (1) (if the installation screw on the fan side is
detached, it can be taken out.)
Installation screw
Installation screw B (1)
(Fixed to the panel)
Installation panel
(Fig. 1) (Fig. 2)
26
(a) Take out the external fan unit from the heat exchanger main unit.
(Fig. 1)
Detach the external fan unit installation screws A (2 pieces), take
out the unit from the main unit by sliding it down, and detach the
earth cable and the power cable to the fan. Also detach the
installation screw B (1 piece).
(b) Install the heat exchanger main unit in the installation section
which has been panel cut. (Fig. 2)
When fastening down the heat exchanger main unit with the
screws, first, temporarily secure the panel and the heat exchanger
main unit with the installation screw B, which was taken out in 1).
After that, secure the main unit by the installation screws. In this
case, the external fan unit installation screw holes should be
aligned with the main unit screw holes. (Please provide the
installation screws for the heat exchanger main unit.)
Because this product is composed of plastic, set the value shown
below for the screw tightening torque.
Heat exchanger main unit (M4 screw): 11 kgf.cm
External fan unit (M3 screw): 5 kgf.cm
(c) Connect the power cable and the earth cable to the external fan unit
(the unit detached in section 1), and secure the installation screw
A to the main unit from the outside.
The installation is now complete.
3.5.3.2 It is necessary to regularly clean the heat pipe type heat exchanger,
Maintenance because the cooling ability is reduced by the accumulation of dust. The
frequency of the cleaning needed differs according to the installation
environment and therefore should be determined by your own judgment
regarding the amount of dirt.
(1) Air filter cleaning and replacement method
(a) When cleaning and replacing the filter, be sure to cut off the fan’s
electric power source.
(b) Detach the filter cover and take out the filter inside.
Detach the cover by pressing the flanges

which are in the grooves of both sides to-
wards the inside using a flat blade screw-
driver, etc.
27
(c) Protect the filter from silting due to dust by blowing air on both
sides.
(d) When dirt is conspicuous, press wash with a neutral detergent, rinse
with clean water, and allow to dry naturally. When replacing,
replace with the same product.
(e) To install, insert the filter in the cover, align the flange in the
groove, and press. Confirm that the cover will not come loose even
if it is pulled.
(2) Cleaning heat exchanger
(a) When cleaning, be sure to cut off the fan power source.
(b) Take out the external fan unit from the heat exchanger main unit.
Detach the two installation
screws (A) of the external fan
Heat exchanger unit, and detach the unit from
main unit the main unit by sliding it
down. Detach the power
Power cable for fan source cable to the fan and
(detach the connector) the earth cable. Also detach
installation screws (B).
External fan unit
Installation screws A (2)
Earth cable (if the installation screw on the

Installation screws B (1) fan side is detached, it can be taken out)
(i) Cleaning fan unit

Wipe the dirt, condensation, etc., which has accumulated on the fan
motor and fan installation case with a dry cloth. When the
condensation, etc. has accumulated and the dirt is difficult to
remove, soak a cloth in neutral detergent, lightly squeeze it and
wipe away the dirt.
However, take care not to allow the detergent to enter the electrical
sections such as the internal rotor of the fan motor.
28
(ii)Cleaning heat exchanger fan

Detach the heat exchanger from the unit and either blow off with
air, wipe off with a dry cloth, or brush the accumulated dirt,
condensation, etc.
When the dirt is especially severe

(1) Detach the internal fan unit, the terminal unit, and the cable
from the main unit.
Main unit
Terminal unit and cable
(2) Using a neutral detergent, remove the dirt from the main unit fan
section by brushing.
At this time, take care not to bend the fin of the element.
(3) After cleaning, dry well.
(iii)Installation
After completing cleaning of the fan unit and heat transformer.
(1) Install the terminal unit and cable in the original position.
(2) Install the fan unit in the original position. At this time, do not
forget to connect the fan power cable and the earth cable.
29
3.6 The CNC has been steadily reduced in size using surface–mount and
custom LSI technologies for electronic components. The CNC also is
ACTION AGAINST designed to be protected from external noise. However, it is difficult to
NOISE measure the level and frequency of noise quantitatively, and noise has
many uncertain factors. It is important to prevent both noise from being
generated and generated noise from being introduced into the CNC. This
precaution improves the stability of the CNC machine tool system.
The CNC component units are often installed close to the parts generating
noise in the power magnetics cabinet. Possible noise sources into the
CNC are capacitive coupling, electromagnetic induction, and ground
loops.
When designing the power magnetics cabinet, guard against noise in the
machine as described in Subsections 3.6.1 to 3.6.5.
3.6.1 The cables used for the CNC machine tool are classified as listed in the
following table:
Separating Signal
Bind the cables in each group as described in the action column.
Lines
Group Signal line Action
A Primary AC power line Bind the cables in group A

separately (Note 1) from groups
Secondary AC power line B and C or cover group A with
an electromagnetic shield (Note
AC/DC power lines (containing 2).
the power lines for the servo
and spindle motors) See Section 3.6.4 and connect
spark killers or diodes with the
AC/DC solenoid solenoid and relay.
AC/DC relay
B DC solenoid (24 VDC) Connect diodes with DC

solenoid and relay.
relay
DC relay (24 VDC)
Bind the cables in group B
separately from group A or
cover group B with an
electromagnetic shield.
shield
DI/DO cable between the CNC Separate group B as far from
and power magnetics cabinet Group C as possible.
DI/DO cable between the CNC It is more desirable to cover

and machine group B with the shield.
30
Group Signal line Action
C Cable between the CNC and Bind the cables in group C

servo amplifier separately from group A or
cover group C with an
Cable for position and velocity electromagnetic shield.
feedback
Cable between the CNC and

spindle amplifier
Separate group C as far from
Cable for the position coder Group B as possible.
Cable for the manual pulse Be sure to perform shield
generator processing
g in Section 3.6.5.
Cable between the CRT and
MDI
RS232C and RS422 interface

cables
Cable for the battery
Other cables to be covered with

the shield
NOTE
1 The groups must be 10 cm or more apart from one another
when binding the cables in each group.
2 The electromagnetic shield refers to shielding between
groups with grounded steel plates.
3.6.2 The following ground systems are provided for the CNC machine tool:
Ground (1) Signal ground system (SG)
The signal ground (SG) supplies the reference voltage (0 V) of the
electrical signal system to the machine.
(2) Frame ground system (FG)
The frame ground system (FG) is used for safety, and suppressing
external and internal noises. In the frame ground system, the frames
and cases of the units, panels, and shields for the interface cables
between the units are connected.
(3) System ground system
The system ground system is used to connect the frame ground
systems connected between devices or units with the ground.
31
Signal ground system

Frame ground system
System ground system
Power Servo CNC
magnetics amplifier control unit
unit
Operator’s panel Machine tool
Power
magnetics
cabinet
Distribution board
WARNING
Notes on connecting the ground systems
D Connect the signal ground with the frame ground (FG) at
only one place in the CNC control unit.
D The grounding resistance of the system ground shall be 100
ohms or less (class 3 grounding).
D The system ground cable must have enough
cross–sectional area to safely carry the accidental current
flow into the system ground when an accident such as a
short circuit occurs.
(Generally, it must have the cross–sectional area of the AC
power cable or more.)
D Use the cable containing the AC power wire and the system
ground wire so that power is supplied with the ground wire
connected.
32
3.6.3 (a) Control unit

Grounding Each Unit
Control unit
PCB
Signal
ground (SG)
SG
M4
(Only thread
hole) M3
M3
(With thread)
Ground cable
Wire with a sectional
area 2 mm2 or more
Ground cable
Ground plate of System ground

the cabinet
Connect the 0 V line of the electronic circuit in the control unit with the
ground plate of the cabinet via the signal ground (SG) terminal.
33
(b) CRT unit
(Rear side) M5 stud
f
14″CRT
(Rear side) M4 stud
f
9″ PDP
9″ CRT
9.5″ LCD
10.4″ LCD
(c) Connection unit 1/2
f×
M4 screw
(d) Operator’s panel connection unit
f×
Ground install board
34
(e) Tape raeder unit
(Rear side) (Rear side)

M5 stud
f
M5 stud
f
Tape reader with reel Tape reader without reel
(f) I/O Unit model A
Ground the terminals for (ABU05A, ABU05B, ABU10A, ABU10B)
ABU05A, ABU10A ABU05B, ABU10B
M4 terminal
for ground
M3 terminal
for ground (SG)
M4 mount hole
for ground
NOTE
Ground SG terminal to the mount hole.
35
3.6.4 The AC/DC solenoid and relay are used in the power magnetics cabinet.
Noise Suppressor A high pulse voltage is caused by coil inductance when these devices are
turned on or off.
This pulse voltage induced through the cable causes the electronic circuits
to be disturbed.
To reduce the pulse voltage, use a spark killer for an AC device or a diode
for a DC device.
Notes on selecting the spark killer

D Use a spark killer consisting of a resistor and capacitor in series. This
type of spark killer is called a CR spark killer.
(A varistor is useful in clamping the peak voltage of the pulse voltage,
but cannot suppress the sudden rise of the pulse voltage. FANUC
therefore recommends a CR spark killer.)
D The reference capacitance and resistance of the spark killer shall
conform to the following based on the current (I (A)) and DC
resistance of the stationary coil:
1) Resistance (R): Equivalent to DC resistance of the coil
2 2
2) Capacitance (C): 1 to 1 (mF)
10 20
R C
Equivalent circuit of thespark killer
Spark killer
AC relay
Motor
Spark killer
36
3.6.5 The CNC cables that require shielding should be clamped by the method
Cable Clamp and shown below. This cable clamp treatment is for both cable support and
proper grounding of the shield. To insure stable CNC system operation,
Shield Processing follow this cable clamp method.
Partially peel out the sheath and expose the shield. Push and clamp by
the plate metal fittings for clamp at the part. Metal fittings for clamp are
attached to the control unit. The ground plate must be made by the
machine tool builder, and set as follows :
Ground plate
Cable
Metal fittings for clamp
40 mm to 80 mm
Fig. 3.6.5 (a) Cable clamp (1)
37
Machine side
installation
board
Control Rack
Ground plate
Metal fittings
for clamp
Shield cover
Fig. 3.6.5 (b) Cable clamp (2)
Prepare ground plate like the following figure.
Ground terminal
(grounded)
Hole for securing metal fitting clamp

Mount screw hole
Fig. 3.6.5 (c) Ground plate
For the ground plate, use a metal plate of 2 mm or thicker, which surface
is plated with nickel.
38
8mm Ground plate
12mm
20mm
Fig. 3.6.5 (d) Ground plate holes Ground plate
(Reference) Outer drawings of metal fittings for clamp.

Max. 55mm
28mm
6mm
17mm
Fig. 3.6.5 (e) Outer drawings of metal fittings for clamp
Ordering specification for metal fittings for clamp

A02B–0118–K001 (5 pieces)
NOTE
Select cables of appropriate length.
We do not recommend using cables longer than necessary.
Such cables may demonstrate poor resistance to electrical
noise or be influenced by electrical noise. Also, if excess
cable is wrapped up in a coil, this may increase impedance.
This may induce an extremely high voltage during ON/OFF
switching of signals, or lead to erroneous operation caused
by malfunction or electrical noise.
39
3.7
CONTROL UNIT
3.7.1 Printed circuit boards used for control of Series 15–B is mounted in a rack
Configuration and equipped with several slots.
Installation of the
Control Unit
ÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃ

Option board Optionboard Option board Option 1 Sub board Main CPU PMC board Power supply
board board unit

ÃÃ
Option board Graphic dis- SUB CPU CNC CPU PMC CPU ON/OFF
RISC play control I/O LINK control
MMC–II Memory Card
MMC–II
Graphic 4–axis control 4–axis control Power
MMC–III spindle ( 2) spindle ( 2) supply unit
MMC–IV Communica- Analog I/O CRT/MDI Conversion
OSI ethernet tion control HDI 4 RS232C 2 control AI or BI
(Remote RS232C HDI 4
buffer) RS422 MPG 3
(DNC 1)
Ã Ã Ã Ã ÃÃ Ã ÃÃ Ã
Ã Ã Ã Ã ÃÃ Ã ÃÃ Ã
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ F–BUS
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
OPTION BASIC
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
MAIN PMC PSU MAIN PMC PSU MAIN PMC PSU MAIN PMC PSU
CPU CPU CPU CPU
Fig. 3.7.1 (a) Control unit configuration of Series 15–B
NOTE
The SUB CPU, RISC, MMC and OSI/Ethernet boards cannot be used on the
15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.
40
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
Option board
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃ
Option board
ÃÃÃÃ
Option board
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

Option 1
board
Sub CPU
board
Main CPU
board
PMC board Power supply
unit
Ã Option board Graphic dis- SUB CPU CNC CPU PMC CPU ON/OFF
Ã
RISC play I/O LINK control
MMC–II control Memory Card
MMC–II
Graphic Analog input CRT/MDI Power
MMC–III HDI 4 RS232Cx2 supply unit
MMC–IV Communica- RS232C HDIx4 Conversion
OSI ethernet tion control RS422 MPGx3 control AI or BI
(Remote buff-
er)
(DNC 1)
ÃÃ Ã ÃÃ Ã Ã Ã Ã ÃÃ
ÃÃ Ã ÃÃ Ã Ã Ã Ã ÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ F–BUS
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ OPTION BASIC
SUB MAIN PMC PSU SUB MAIN PMC PSU SUB MAIN PMC PSU
CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU
Fig. 3.7.1 (b) Control unit configuration of Series 15–B (Multiple axis)
NOTE
The SUB CPU, RISC, MMC and OSI/Ethernet boards cannot be used on the
41
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
board
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
AXES CPU
ÃÃÃÃ
Buffer board AXES CPU
board
Power
supplyy unit
ÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
AXES CPU Buffer AXES CPU ON/OFF
control
4–axis control 4–axis control Power

spindle ( 2) spindle ( 2) supply unit
Near zero Near zero
MPG 3
AI or BI
ÃÃ Ã ÃÃ Ã
ÃÃ Ã ÃÃ Ã
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
OPTION BASIC
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
BUF AXES PSU BUF AXES PSU BUF AXES PSU
FER CPU FER CPU FER CPU
Fig. 3.7.1 (c) Configuration of Series 15–B additional locker used with multiaxis machines
NOTE
More than one axis CPU board may be used, depending on
the system configuration.
The rack consists of a plastic box, fan motors and a backplane PCB. Since
the rack is provided with built–in fan motors, it does not require the
external air flow conditions described in Section 3.5. The air comes into
the rack from the bottom and goes out through the fan motor, which is
located on the top of the rack. Space as shown in Fig. 3.7.1 (d) must be
reserved not to disturb the air flow ((A), (B))
The backplane PCB, which is located on the rear side of the rack,
interconnects the PCBs installed in the rack. It has another connector
which appears at the left side panel of the rack. The connector may be used
in the future. The space (C) for this shall be reserved as shown in Fig.
3.7.1 (d).
42
AIR FLOW AIR FLOW unit [mm]
50
250
50
30
172
Fig. 3.7.1 (d)
43
3.7.2
Battery for Memory
Backup
ÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃ
WARNING
The part program, offset data and system parameters are stored in the
CMOS memory of the control unit and they are retained even while the
main power is cut off. The power of the memory is backed up by a lithium
battery which is mounted on the front panel of the power supply unit. Data
is retained even while the main power is OFF. The control unit is shipped
from the factory equipped with the battery.
Replace the battery within one week after the “BAT” warning message is
displayed blinking on the CRT screen indicating lower battery power, or
when the battery alarm signal is output to the PMC. Otherwise, data in
memory will be lost.
A lithium battery is used for the battery. Follow the following
precautions.
WARNING
Incorrect replacement of the battery may cause an
explosion.
Replace only with the specified battery.
Power Supply
Unit front panel
Battery
Compartment
Battery inside
Fig. 3.7.2
NOTE
The part program, parameters and variables are stored to
non–volatile memory in the CNC unit. Normally, turning the
power ON and OFF will not cause data in memory to be lost.
However, it is conceivable that erroneous operation may
delete data, or important data stored in non–volatile may
have to be deleted to restore trouble.
We recommend backing up data beforehand so that the
system can be restored quickly in the event that unexpected
trouble occurs.
44
3.7.3
Replacing the Battery
ÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃ
WARNING
Before you replace the battery, turn the machine tool (CNC) ON and make
an emergency stop.
Replacing the battery involves opening the cabinet with the power still
ON. So, only personnel trained in maintenance and safety procedures may
ÃÃ
Ã
replace batteries.
When you open the cabinet to replace the battery, do not touch
high–voltage circuits indicated by the
anti–electric shock covers. Ã
ÃÃ
mark and covered with
If the cover becomes loose and you touch a high–voltage circuit, you will
be electrocuted.
(1) Use a lithium battery.
When using battery unit A02B–0162–H101 or –H102
Ordering drawing number: A02B–0120–K106
When using battery unit A02B–0162–H107 or –H108
Ordering drawing number: A02B–0200–K102
(2) Turn on the 15–B.
(3) Remove the battery case from the front panel of the power supply unit.
The case can be removed easily by holding the top and bottom of it and
pulling.
Front panel of the

power supply unit
Battery case
Battery
Fig. 3.7.3 (a) Replacing the battery (1)
45
(4) Remove the connector from the battery.
BATTERY
Cable connector
PC board
connector
Battery
Front panel of hte

power supply unit
Fig. 3.7.3 (b) Replacing the battery (2)
(5) Replace the battery and reconnect the connector.

(6) Install the battery case.
(7) Turn off the Series 15–B.
46
3.8
CABLE LEAD–IN
DIAGRAM
3.8.1
Configuration of
Control Unit
Connectors
unit [mm]
Power supply
unit
Fig. 3.8.1 (a)
(1) Above diagram shows the grid of connector location.

Control board may not have all connectors as shown above.
For actual connector layout of each board, please see the connector
layout diagrams in Fig. 3.8.1 (c) – (s).
47
(2) For the power supply unit, please see Fig. 3.8.1 (b–1) and (b–2).
Minislot
unit [mm]
Fig. 3.8.1 (b–1) Power unit connector layout

For power unit A02B–0162–H101 and –H102
48
unit [mm]
Fig. 3.8.1 (b–2) Power unit connector layout

For power unit A02B–0162–H107 and –H108
49
UPPER LINE LOWER LINE

FUNCTION MARKING MARKING
LED INDICATORS
POS. MEMORY CARD I/F
SERIAL I/O LINK IOLINK JD1A
Fig. 3.8.1 (c) PMC board
50

LED INDICATORS
POS. CRT DISPLAY
MDI
SERIAL PORT 1
SERIAL PORT 2
MPG
HIGH SPEED DI–1
SERIAL SPINDLE 1
SPDL-1 JA7A
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
(POSITION CODER–1)
ANALOG OUT
APC BATTERY
APCBAT JA4A
SERVO AMP 1
SERVO AMP 2
SERVO AMP 3
SERVO AMP 4
PULSE CODER 1
PULSE CODER 2
PULSE CODER 3
PULSE CODER 4
LINEAR SCALE 1
LINEAR SCALE 2
LINEAR SCALE 3
LINEAR SCALE 4
Fig. 3.8.1 (d) Main CPU board
51

LED INDICATORS
POS.
SERIAL PORT 9
SERIAL PORT 4
HIGH SPEED DI–2
ANALOG INPUT
POSITION CODER–2
ANALOG OUT–2
APC BATTERY
SERVO AMP 5
SERVO AMP 6
SERVO AMP 7
SERVO AMP 8
PULSE CODER 5
PULSE CODER 6
PULSE CODER 7
PULSE CODER 8
LINEAR SCALE 5
LINEAR SCALE 6
LINEAR SCALE 7
LINEAR SCALE 8
Fig. 3.8.1 (e) SUB board
52

LED INDICATORS
POS. CRT DISPLAY
RS232C PORT3
RS422 PORT1
With only With graphic With only

graphic function and communication
function communication function
function
Fig. 3.8.1 (f) Option 1 board
NOTE
The communication function refers to the remote buffer
function or DNC1 function.
53

LEDs
POS.
Hard disk interface
Floppy disk interface
Graphic bus
Keyboard interface
RS–422 interface
Centronics interface
RS–232C interface, channel 1
RS–232C interface, channel 2
Fig. 3.8.1 (g) MMC–II CPU board
NOTE
The MMC–II CPU (A02B–0120–J202), which requires
three RS–232C channels, uses JD6 as an RS–232C port.
54

LEDs
POS.
Graphic bus
CRT interface
Not used
Fig. 3.8.1 (h) MMC–II graphic board
55

LEDs
POS. VIDEO output (CNC side)
Video input
Serial port 6
Serial port 7
Serial port 8
Fig. 3.8.1 (i) MMC–III CPU board
56

LEDs
POS. CRT I/F
MDI I/F
Serial bort 1
Serial bort 2
Manual pulse generator I/F

High DI I/F
Battery backup for

board replacement
Multiple axis–Bus
Fig. 3.8.1 (j) Multiple main CPU board
57

LEDs
POS.
Serial port 9
Serial port 4
High speed DI I/F

Analog input
Fig. 3.8.1 (k) Multiple SUB CPU board
58

LEDs
POS.
Operation check input 1
Near zero input
Serial spindle 2
Analog spindle 2
APC Battery
Servo amplifier 1
Servo amplifier 2
Servo amplifier 3
Servo amplifier 4
Pulse coder 1
Pulse coder 2
Pulse coder 3
Pulse coder 4
Linear scale 1
Linear scale 2
Linear scale 3
Linear scale 4
Fig. 3.8.1 (l) AXIS CPU board
59

LEDs
POS.
Multiple axis–Bus
Fig. 3.8.1 (m) Multiple buffer board
60
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃ ÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃ Ã Ã
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃ Ã Ã
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
LEDs STATUS/ALARM
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
POS. 1
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
2
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
3
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
4
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
5
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
6
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
7
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
8
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
9
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
10
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
11
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
12
13
14 ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
15
16 ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
17
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃ ÃÃÃ
18
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃ ÃÃÃ
ÃÃ
LEDs LV ALM
19
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃ ÃÃÃ
ÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃ
ÃÃ
20 Fuse F21 5A
21
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃ
ÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
Fig. 3.8.1 (n) RISC board
NOTE
The RISC board cannot be used on the
61
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
Ã Ã
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
Ã Ã
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
LEDs STATUS/ALARM
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
POS. 1
ÃÃÃÃ
2
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
NC Video signal input NC CRT JA1B
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃ
3 Video signal output CRT JA1A
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃ
4 Serial port 1 R232–1 JD5F
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃ ÃÃ
5 Serial port 2 R232–2 JD5G
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃ
6 LCD adjustment LCD ADJUST
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃ ÃÃ
7
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃ
8 Floppy disk drive FDD JD8
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃ
9
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃ
10
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃ ÃÃÃ
11 Parallel keyboard CENTRO JD9
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃ
12 Full keyboard KEYBOARD CD32A
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
13
ÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
14 LEDs AL4 (FUSE)
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
LEDs AL5 (POWER)
15
LEDs AL6 (BATTERY)
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
16
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
17
Battery BATTERY BAT2
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
18
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
19
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃ ÃÃ
20
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
21
ÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
Mouse MOUSE CD32B
ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
Fig. 3.8.1 (o) MMC–IV board
NOTE
The MMC–IV board cannot be used on the
62
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃ
Ã Ã
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ Ã LEDs STATUS/ALARM
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
POS. 1
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
2
Fuse F1 2.0A
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
3
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃ
4
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃ
5
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
6
10BASE2 I/F 10BASE2 CNX
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
7
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
8
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
9
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
10
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
11
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃ
12
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃ
13
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
Switch LOAD
ÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
14
ÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
15 Switch RESTART
ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
16
ÃÃ ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
17
ÃÃ ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
18
ÃÃÃ
Serial port RS–232–C CD29
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
19
ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
20
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
21
ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
Fig. 3.8.1 (p) OSI/Ethernet board (10BASE2)
NOTE
The OSI/Ethernet board cannot be used on the
63
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃ ÃÃ
Ã Ã
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ Ã
ÃÃÃÃÃ Ã
ÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
LEDs STATUS/ALARM
ÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃ ÃÃ
POS. 1 Fuse F1 2.0A
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃ
2
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
3
ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃ
4
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃ
5
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃ ÃÃÃ
6
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃ
7
AUI I/F AUI CD27
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃ
8
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
9
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
10
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
11
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃ
12
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
13 Switch LOAD
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃ
14
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
15
ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
Switch RESTART
ÃÃÃ
16
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃ ÃÃÃ
17
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
18
ÃÃÃ
Serial port RS–232–C CD29
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
19
ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
20
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
21
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
Fig. 3.8.1 (q) OSI/Ethernet board (10BASE5)
NOTE
The OSI/Ethernet board cannot be used on the
64
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃ ÃÃ
Ã Ã
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ Ã
ÃÃ ÃÃ
Ã Ã
ÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
LEDs STATUS/ALARM
ÃÃ ÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
POS.1
ÃÃ ÃÃ
Fuse F1 2.0A
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
2
ÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
3
ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
4
ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃ
5
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃ
6
ÃÃ
Ethernet interface AUI CD27
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃ
7
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃ
8
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
9
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
10
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
11
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃ
12
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
13 Bult–in HDD access lamp HDD
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
14
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
15
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
16
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
17
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
18
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
19
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
20
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
21
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
Fig. 3.8.1 (r) Data server board
65
UPPER LINE LOWER LINE LEFT LINE RIGHT LINE

FUNCTION MARKING MARKING MARKING MARKING
LEDs STATUS
Rotary switch SW
LEDs AL 21
High–speed serial bus interface HSSB COP7
Mini slot interface JNAM
Fig. 3.8.1 (s) HSSB interface board
66
3.8.2
Cable Lead–in for
Stand–alone Cabinet A
67
3.8.3
Cable Lead–in for
Stand–alone Cabinet B
68
3.8.4
Cable Lead–in for
Additional Cabinet A
69
3.9
MAINTENANCE
AREA
3.9.1
Maintenance Area for
Self–standing A Type
Cabinet
About
About 130°
70
3.9.2
Self–standing B Type
Cabinet
About
ÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃ
About 130°
71
3.9.3
Additional Cabinet A
About
About
72
B–62073E/04 4. TOTAL CONNECTION
4 TOTAL CONNECTION
73
4. TOTAL CONNECTION B–62073E/04
4.1
CONNECTION
DIAGRAM FOR
SERIES
15–TB/TTB/MB/TFB/
TTFB/MFB, SERIES
150–TB/MB/TTB
(IN CASE OF SERIAL
SPINDLE)
4.1.1
Connection Diagram
for Series
15–TB/TTB/MB/TFB/
TTFB/MFB, Series
150–TB/MB/TTB
(When LCD/MDI Unit
with Built–in Graphic
Functions is not Used)
74
Power supply
AC–IN(CP1)
ÑÑ
Ñ
Ñ
ÑÑ AC200V–240V POWER
AC–OUT(CP2)
Ñ
ÑÑ
AC–OUT(CP3)
ÑÑ
ÑÑ ÎÎ ON/OFF
ÑÑ
ÑÑ
ON/OFF(CP4)
CN2 CRT/MDI
Ñ
ÑÑ
+24V(CP5)
+24E(CP6) +24V WHEN 9″ MONOCHROME CRT CN1 UNIT
CNK1
PMC BOARD
ÎÎÎ Î
Î
CP61 OP PANEL
OPERATOR’S
Î
JD1A INTERFACE : :
MEMORY PANEL
MEM CARD JD1B UNIT
CARD
(ICMC)
JD1A
ÎÎÎ POWER
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
FANUC I/O Link MAGNETICS
IOLINK(JD1A) JD1B I/O Unit
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
CP32 MODEL–A
MAIN CPU
CRT(JA1) 24VDC
Î
MDI(JA2)
Î ÑÑ
R232–1(JD5A) RS232–C I/O DEVICE
R232–2(JD5B)
Î ÑÑ
C
O MPG(JA3) MPG 3
N HDI–1(JA5A) HIGH–SPEED DI 4
Î
ÎÎ
T
R POSITION
O
Î Î
ÎÎ
α SERIES CN2 CODER
Î Î
L CN13 SERIAL
Î
SPDL–1(JA7A) CN11A SPINDLE
U INTERFACE MOTOR
N CN11B SPINDLE
I 200VAC
T To 2ND AMP
APC BATTERY
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
EMERGENCY STOP
AC100V
Î ÎÎ
1ST SERVO
APCBAT(JA4A) AMP T1 AC200V
Î ÎÎ
6V
Î ÎÎ
AMP1(JV1) CN1 1ST SERVO
ÎÎ
MOTOR
ENC1(JF1)
ÎÎ
SERIAL PULSE CODER
ÎÎ
SCALE1(JF21) SCALE
AMP2(JV2)
ENC2(JF2) 2ND SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE
SCALE2(JF22)
AMP3(JV3)
ENC3(JF3) 3RD SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE
SCALE3(JF23)
AMP4(JV4)
ENC4(JF4) 4TH SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE
SCALE4(JF24)
75
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎSUB BOARD
Î
R232–9(JD5J)
Î RS–232–C
Î
I/O DEVICE
R422–4(JD6D) RS–422
I/O DEVICE
A–IN(JA6) ANALOG I/O 4
HDI–2(JA5B) HIGH SPEED DI 4
SPDL–2(JA7B)
ASPDL–2(JA8B)
Î ÎÎ
EMERGENCY STOP
APC BATTERY
Î Î
AC100V
5TH SERVO
APCBAT(JA4B) 6V AC200V
ÎÎÎ Î
AMP T1
C
Î
ÎÎ Î
O AMP1(JV5) CN1 5TH SERVO
N MOTOR
T
ÎÎ
ENC1(JF5) SERIAL PULSE
R CODER
ÎÎ
O
L SCALE1(JF25) SCALE
U AMP2(JV6)
N ENC2(JF6) 6TH AXIS SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE
I SCALE2(JF26)
T AMP3(JV7)
ENC3(JF7) 7TH AXIS SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE
SCALE3(JF27)
AMP4(JV8)
SCALE4(JF28)
OPTION 1
To CRT (In case of graphic display)
CRT(JA1)
RS232–3(JD5C) REMOTE BUFFER (RS–232–C)
RS422–1(JD6A) REMOTE BUFFER/DNC1 (RS–422/RS485)
ÌÌ PCR 20 connector (20 pins)
ÑÑ PCR 20 connector (15 pins)
ÑÑ
AMP connector
Others
NOTE
Some connections in the above diagram may not be
provided, depending on the system configuration.
76
4.1.2
Connection Diagram
for Series
15–TB/TTB/MB
(When LCD/MDI Unit
with Built–in Graphic
Functions is Used)
77
POWER SUPPLY
AC–IN (CP1) AC200V–240V POWER

AC–OUT(CP2)
AC–OUT(CP3)
ON/OFF(CP4) ON/OFF JA2
+24V(CP5) CP5
LCD with
+24E(CP6) JN1 graphic CNK2
MDI
function CNK1
PMC BOARD
Ì CP61 OP PANEL OPERA-
ÏÌ Ì
JD1A INTERFACE :: TOR’S
MEM CARD MEMORY JD1B UNIT PANEL
Ì
(CNMC) CARD
ÌÌ Ì
JD1A
FANUC I/O Link I/O Unit POWER
IOLINK JD1B MODEL–A MAGNETICS
(JD1A) CP32
Ô
MAIN CPU
C 24VDC
O CRT(JA1)
Ô
ÌÏ
ÌÌ
ÌÌ
N MDI(JA2)
ÌÌ
T R232–1(JD5A) RS232C I/O DEVICE
R
Ì
R232–2(JD5B)
O MPG 3
MPG(JA3)
Ì
L
HDI–1(JA5A) HIGH SPEED DI 4 POSITION
U CODER
α SERIES CN2
ÌÌ ÌÌÌ
N
SERIAL SPINDLE
I
Ì
ÌÌ
ÌÌÌ
SPDL–1(JA7A) JA7B INTERFACE MOTOR
T JA7A SPINDLE
Ì
200VAC
ÌÌ
2ND AMP
APCBAT APC BATTERY EMERGENCY STOP
ÌÌ
1ST SERVO AMP AC100V
(JA4A) 6V AC200V
T1
AMP1(JV1)
ÌÌ CN1 1ST SERVO
Ì
MOTOR
ENC1(JF1)
Ì
SERIAL PULSE CODER
Ì
SCALE
SCALE1
Ì
ÌÌ
(JF21)
AMP2(JV2)
ENC2(JF2)
Ì 2ND SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE
ÌÌ
SCALE2(JF22)
Ì
AMP3(JV3)
3RD SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE
ÌÌ
ENC3(JF3)
SCALE3(JF23)
AMP4(JV4)
ÌÌ
Ì
SCALE4(JF24)
78
ÌÌÌ
SUB BOARD
R232–9(JD5J)
R422–4(JD6D) ÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌ
RS–232–C I/O DEVICE
RS–422 I/O DEVICE
A–IN(JA6)
ÌÌÌ ANALOG I/O 4
HDI–2 (JA5B)
ÌÌÌ HIGH SPEED DI 4
ÌÌ
ÌÌ
SPDL–2 (JA7B)
C
ÌÌ
O ASPDL–2
(JA8B)
N
EMERGENCY STOP
T
ÌÌÌ
APC BATTERY
R APCBAT
5TH AC100V
ÌÌÌ
6V SERVO AMP T1 AC200V
O (JA4B)
ÌÌ
L CN1 5TH SERVO
AMP1(JV5 )
MOTOR
U ENC1(JF5 )
ÌÌ SERIAL PULSE
ÌÌ
N CODER
I
ÌÌ
SCALE1 SCALE
T (JF25)
ÌÌÌ
ÌÌ
AMP2(JV6 )
6TH AXIS
ÌÌÌ
ENC2(JF6 ) SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE
SCALE2(JF26)
AMP3(JV7 )
ÌÌÌ
ÌÌ
7TH AXIS
ENC3(JF7 )
SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE
ÌÌÌ
SCALE3(JF27)
ÌÌ
AMP4(JV8 )
ENC4(JF8 ) 8TH AXIS
ÌÌ
SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE
SCALE4(JF28)
Ì
Ì
PCR 20 connector (20 pins)
Ñ
AMP connector
Others
NOTE
79
4.2
CONNECTION
DIAGRAM FOR
SERIES
15–TB/TTB/MB/TFB/
TTFB/MFB, SERIES
150–TB/MB/TTB
(IN CASE OF
ANALOG SPINDLE)
80
POWER SUPPLY
ÑÑÑ
Ñ
AC–IN(CP1) AC200V–240V
ÑÑ
AC–OUT(CP2) POWER
AC–OUT(CP3)
ÑÑ
ON/OFF(CP4)
ON/OFF
ÑÑ
+24V(CP5)
+24E(CP6) CN2
Ì
CRT/MDI
+24V WHEN 9″ CN1 UNIT
MONOCHROME CRT CNK1
PMC BOARD
Ì CP61 OP PANEL OPER-
ÌÌ MEMORY
Ì Ì JD1A INTERFACE :: ATOR’S
ÌÌ
MEM CARD
CARD JD1B UNIT PANEL
(CNMC)
Ì
ÌÌ
IOLINK
Ì
FANUC I/O Link Ì
ÌÌÌ
JD1A
JD1B
I/O Unit POWER
MAGNET-
Ì
(JD1A) MODEL–A
CP32 ICS
ÌÌ
MAIN CPU
C CRT(JA1) 24VDC
O MDI(JA2)
ÌÌ
ÌÌ
N R232–1(JD5A) RS232C I/O DEVICE
T
Ì Ó
R232–2(JD5B)
R
Ì Ó
O MPG(JA3) MPG 3
Ì
L
HDI–1(JA5A) HIGH SPEED DI 4
U POSITION
N CODER
ANALOG CN2
I
ÌÌ
INTERFACE
T SPINDLE SPINDLE
Ì Ì
SPDL–1(JA7A)
MOTOR
ÌÌ
ASPDL–1(JA8A) 200VAC
ÌÌ
EMERGENCY STOP
APC BATTERY
1ST 100VAC
ÌÌ
APCBAT(JA4A) 6V SERVO AMP T1 200VAC
Ì Ì
MOTOR
ENC1(JF1)
Ì SERIAL PULSE
Ì
CODER
SCALE1(JF21)
Ì SCALE
ÌÌ
Ì
AMP2(JV2)
Ì
ENC2(JF2) 2ND SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE
SCALE2(JF22)
ÌÌ
ÌÌ
AMP3(JV3)
Ì
ENC3(JF3) 3RD SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE
SCALE3(JF23)
ÌÌ
Ì
AMP4(JV4)
Ì
SCALE4(JF24)
81
ÌÌ
SUB BOARD
ÌÌ
R232–9(JD5J) RS–232–C I/O DEVICE
ÌÌ
R422–4(JD6D) RS–422 I/O DEVICE
A–IN(JA6)
ÌÌ ANALOG I/O 4
HDI–2(JA5B)
ÌÌ HIGH SPEED DI 4
POSITION
ÌÌ
CODER
SPDL–2(JA7B) ANALOG
INTERFACE
SPINDLE
ÌÌ
SPINDLE
MOTOR
Ì
C
ASPDL–2(JA8B) 200VAC
O
ÌÌ
N EMERGENCY STOP
APC BATTERY
ÌÌ
T 5TH AC100V
R APCBAT(JA4B) 6V SERVO AMP T1 AC200V
O
AMP1(JV5)
Ì Ì CN1 5TH SERVO
Ì
L MOTOR
ENC1(JF5) SERIAL PULSE
U CODER
Ì
N
Ì Ì
I SCALE1(JF25) SCALE
T
AMP2(JV6)
ÌÌ
Ì
ÌÌ
SCALE2(JF26)
AMP3(JV7)
Ì Ì
Ì
ÌÌ
SCALE3(JF27)
AMP4(JV8)
ÌÌ
Ì
SCALE4(JF28)
Ì
To CRT (in case of graphic display)
OPTION–1
CRT(JA1)
RS232–3(JD5C)
Ì
ÌÌÌ REMOTE BUFFER (RS232–C)
RS422–1(JD6A)
ÌÌ
Ì
REMOTE BUFFER/DNC1 (RS422/RS485)
Ñ
Ñ AMP connector
Others
NOTE
82
4.3
CONNECTION
DIAGRAM FOR
SERIES 15–MB OR
SERIES 150–MB
(IN CASE OF
MULTIPLE AXIS)
83
4.3.1
Control Unit
ÑÑ ÑÑÑ 200 to
ÑÑ
POWER SUPPLY
ÑÑÑ ÑÑÑ
CPD1 INPUT 240VAC
AC–IN(CP1)
ÑÑ ÑÑÑ
CPD2B UNIT POWER
AC–OUT(CP2)
CPD2A
Ñ Ñ
AC–OUT(CP3)
ON/OFF(CP4)
+24V(CP5)
ÑÑ CN2 CRT/MDI
ÑÑ ÒÒÒ
+24V WHEN 9″ MONOCHROME CRT
+24E(CP6) CN1 UNIT
CNK1 ON/OFF
PMC BOARD
Ò
Ò
CP61 OP PANEL OPERA-
C
MEM CARD(CNMC)
ÒÒ MEMORY
CARD
Ò
JD1A
JD1B
INTERFACE
UNIT
:: TOR’S
PANEL
Ò Ò Ò
O
ÒÒ Ò
N JD1A
FANUC I/O Link I/O Unit POWER
T I/O LINK(JD1A) JD1B MAGNETICS
MODEL–A
R
CP32
O
L 24VDC
ÒÒ
MAIN CPU BOARD
ÒÒ
U CRT(JA1)
N MDI(JA2)
ÒÒ ÓÓ
I R232–1(JD5A) RS232C I/O DEVICE
Ò ÓÓ
T R232–2(JD5B)
Ò ÓÓ
MPG(JA3) 3
HDI–1(JA5A)
MAX BUS(JNC)
Ò HIGH SPEED DI 4
SUB CPU BOARD

ÒÒ
R232–9(JD5J)
ÒÒ RS232C I/O DEVICE
ÒÒ
Ò Ò
R422–4(JD6D) RS422 I/O DEVICE
ÒÒ
A–IN(JA6) ANALOG INPUT 4
HIGH SPEED DI 4
HDI–2(JA5B)
Ò
OPTION–1 BOARD
Ò
To CRT (in case of graphic display)
CRT(JA1)
ÒÒ
ÒÒ
RS232–3(JD5C) REMOTE BUFFER (RS232–C)
RS422–1(JD6A)
ÒÒ Ì
REMOTE BUFFER/DNC1 (RS422/RS485)
Ì PCR 20 connector (20 pins)
Ñ
TO ADDITIONAL CABINET (BUFFER BOARD “JNC”)
Ñ
AMP connector
Others
NOTE
84
4.3.2
Additional Cabinet
(In Case of Serial
Spindle Interface)
ÑÑ
Ñ
ÑÑÑ Ñ
ÑÑ
POWER SUPPLY
CPD1 INPUT
ÑÑÑ
AC–IN(CP1)
CPD2C UNIT
BUFFER BOARD
ÒÒÒ
MAX BUS(JNC)
ÒÒÒ To control unit (Main CPU board “JNC”)
POSITION
ÒÒ
Ò
CODER
1ST CPU BOARD α SERIES CN2
ÒÒÒ Ò
ÒÒ SERIAL
Ò
ÒÒ
SPDL–1(JA7A) JA7B SPINDLE
INTERFACE MOTOR
ÒÒÒ
JA7A SPINDLE
200VAC
ÒÒÒ
ASPDL–1(JA8A) APC BATTERY TO 2ND AMP
ÒÒÒ EMERGENCY STOP
ÒÒÒ
1ST SERVO AMP
AC100V
A APCBAT(JA4) 6V
ÒÒÒ
T1 AC200V
D
D
ÒÒ
I MOTOR
ÒÒ
T SERIAL PULSE
ENC1(JF1)
I
ÒÒ
CODER
O
ÒÒÒ
N SCALE1(JF21) SCALE
A
ÒÒÒ
L AMP2(JV2)
ÒÒÒ
ENC2(JF2) 2ND AXIS SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE
C
ÒÒÒ
SCALE2(JF22)
A
AMP3(JV3)
ÒÒ
B
I ENC3(JF3) 3RD AXIS SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE
ÒÒÒ
N SCALE3(JF23)
E
ÒÒ
AMP4(JV4)
T ENC4(JF4) 4TH AXIS SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE
ÒÒ
SCALE4(JF24)
ÒÒ
ADDS1(JF61) 1ST AXIS PULSE POSITION DETECTOR
ÒÒ
ADDS2(JF62) 2ND AXIS PULSE POSITION DETECTOR
ÒÒ
ÒÒ
ADDS3(JF63) 3RD AXIS PULSE POSITION DETECTOR
ÒÒ
ÒÒ
ADDS4(JF64) 4TH AXIS PULSE POSITION DETECTOR
ÒÒ
ÒÒ
NZ/ZD(JA16)
Ì
Reference position approach signal
Ì
Ñ
More than one axis CPU board may be used, depending PCR 20 connector (15 pins)
2ND CPU BOARD
on the system configuration. AMP connector
Others
85
NOTE
4.3.3
Additional Cabinet
(In Case of Analog
Spindle Interface)
86
ÑÑ
Ñ
POWER SUPPLY
ÑÑÑ Ñ
ÑÑ CPD1 INPUT T
ÑÑÑ Ñ
ÑÑ
AC–IN(CP1)
CPD2C UNIT
ÒÒÒ
BUFFER BOARD
MAX BUS(JNC) To control unit (Main CPU board “JNC”)
POSITION
CODER
ÒÒÒ
1ST CPU BOARD
ANALOG
ÒÒÒ
INTERFACE SPINDLE
SPDL–1(JA7A)
SPINDLE MOTOR
ÒÒÒ 200VAC
ÒÒÒ
ASPDL–1(JA8A)
A
D ÒÒ
ÒÒÒ
APCBAT(JA4)
Ò
APC BATTERY
6V
1ST SERBO
AMP
EMERGENCY STOP
AC100V
ÒÒÒ
D T1 AC200V
I
ÒÒ
T MOTOR
ÒÒ
I
O ENC1(JF1) SERIAL PULSE
ÒÒ
N CODER
ÒÒÒ
A SCALE1(JF21) SCALE
L
ÒÒÒ
AMP2(JV2)
ÒÒ
C
A ENC2(JF2) 2ND AXIS SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE
ÒÒÒ
B SCALE2(JF22)
I
ÒÒ
AMP3(JV3)
N ENC3(JF3) 3RD AXIS SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE
ÒÒÒ
E SCALE3(JF23)
T
ÒÒÒ
AMP4(JV4)
ÒÒ
SCALE4(JF24)
ÒÒ
ADDS1(JF61) 1ST AXIS PULSE POSITION DETECTOR
ÒÒ
ÒÒ
ADDS2(JF62) 2ND AXIS PULSE POSITION DETECTOR
ÒÒ
ÒÒ
ADDS3(JF63) 3RD AXIS PULSE POSITION DETECTOR
ÒÒ
ÒÒ
ADDS4(JF64) 4TH AXIS PULSE POSITION DETECTOR
ÒÒ Reference position approach signal
ÌÌ
NZ/ZD(JA16)
ÑÑ
More than one axis CPU board may be used, depending
2ND CPU BOARD PCR 20 connector (15 pins)
ÑÑ
on the system configuration.
AMP connector
Others
NOTE
87
4.3.4 Instead of the two flat cables employed by the F15–A (used with multiaxis
Connection Between machines), a 96–core cable is used to connect the control unit to the
additional locker. The cable length, however, is the same as that of the
the Control Unit and F15–A (1.5 m).
Additional Locker
1.5–m 96–core cable (supplied by FANUC)

Specification: A02B–0162–K821
88
4.4
CONNECTION
DIAGRAM FOR
SERIES 15–B (IN
CASE OF MMC–II)
ÑÑ
POWER SUPPLY
Ñ Ñ
AC–IN(CP1) 200–240VAC POWER
SUPPLY
ÑÑ
AC–OUT(CP2)
AC–OUT(CP3)
ÑÑ
ÑÑ
ON/OFF(CP4) ON/OFF
Ò
+24V(CP5) CN2
CRT/MDI
Ò
CN1 UNIT
CNK1
ÒÒ
Main CPU BOARD
MDI(JA2)
PW2 HARD
JD7A DISK
MMC–II
UNIT
GRAPHIC BOARD
Ò
JD7B
C
O CRT(JA1)
N SCSI terminator CASSETTE
T
STREAMER UNIT
R
JD7B
O MMC–II
L MAIN CPU BOARD
JD7A PW1
Ò
U
N
I
Ò
HDD(JD7)
ÒÒ
T
FLOPPY DISK
FDD(JD8) JD8 PW1
ÒÒ
CENTRO(JD9)
CENTRONICS PRINTER
Ò
ÒÒ
RS422(JD6)
Ò
(Note 2) RS422 I/O DEVICE
Ò Ò
RS232C I/O DEVICE
R232–1(JD5A)
ÒÒ
RS232C I/O DEVICE
R232–2(JD5B) RS232C I/O DEVICE
ÒÒ
EXTENSION
ÒÒ
ADAPTER UNIT
KEY(JD5C) JD5 CD14 KEYBOARD UNIT
ÌÌ
JA1 CA38
ÌÌ
ÑÑ
ÑÑ
AMP connector
Others
89
NOTE
1 The above diagram shows the connections between the MMC–II and peripheral devices. For
details of the other connections, see 4.1, 4.2, and 4.3.
2 The MMC–II CPU (A02B–0120–J202), which requires three RS–232C channels, uses JD6 as
an RS–232C port.
3 The MMC–II board cannot be used on the 15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.
90
4.5
CONNECTION
DIAGRAM FOR
SERIES 15–B (IN
CASE OF MMC–III)
ÑÑÑ
POWER SUPPLY
ÑÑÑ
AC–IN(CP1) AC200V–240V POWER
AC–OUT(CP2) SUPPLY
AC–OUT(CP3)
ÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑ
ON/OFF(CP4) ON/OFF
ÑÑÑ ÒÒ
Ò
+24V(CP5) CN2
CRT/MDI
CN1
Ò
ÒÒ
UNIT
MINI SLOT CNK1
C EXTERNAL HARD
O DISK INTERFACE
(Note 2)
N SCSI(JD19)
T
ÌÌÌ
R
MAIN CPU BOARD
O
MDI(JA2)
L
ÒÒ
U OPTION 1 BOARD
N
ÒÒ
External hard disk
I CRT(JA1) (POKEDY2.5)
T
(Note 2)
MMC–III CPU
ÒÒ
ÒÒ
NC CRT(JA1B)
ÒÒ
CART(JA1A)
ÒÒÒ
ÒÒÒ
R232–1(JD5F) RS232C CHANNEL1
ÒÒÒ
R232–2(JD5G) RS232C CHANNEL2
ÒÒÒ
R232–3(JD5H) RS232C CHANNEL3
ÌÌ
ÑÑ
ÑÑ
AMP connector
Others (connection to external
hard disk–3M MDR connector)
NOTE
1 The above diagram shows the connections between the MMC–III and peripheral devices. For
2 Used for application download only.
3 The MMC–III board cannot be used on the 15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.
91
4.6
CONNECTION
DIAGRAM FOR
MMC–IV
ŠŠŠ
POWER SUPPLY
ŠŠŠ
AC–IN (CP1) AC200V–240V
POWER SUPPLY
ŠŠŠ
AC–OUT (CP2)
AC–OUT (CP3)
ON/OFF (CP4)
ŠŠŠ Ì
ÌÌ ON/OFF
ŠŠŠ ÌÌ
Ì
+24V (CP5) CN2 CRT/MDI
Ì
ÌÌ
CN1 UNIT
CNK1
ÌÌÌ
O MAIN CPU BOARD
N
MDI (JA2)
T
ÌÌÌ
R
O Option 1 BOARD
ÌÌÌ
L
CRT (JA1)
U
N
ÌÌ
ÌÌÌ
I
T MMC–IV CPU
Ì
NC CRT (JA1B)
CRT (JA1A)
ÌÌÌ
R232–1 (JD5F)
ÌÌÌ
RS232C I/O DEVICE
R232–2 (JD5G)
FLOPPY DISK UNIT
*
FDD (JD8) JD8 PW1 AC100V IN
CENTRO (JD9)
ÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌ
*
PRINTER POWER
SUPPLY
ÌÌÌ
EX KEY (JD21)
*
CUSTOM
KEYBOARD
*
KEYBOARD (CD32A) FULL KEYBOARD
Ì
MOUSE (CD32B) MOUSE
Ì
Š : PCR20 connector (20 pins)
Š : AMP connector
: Others
92
NOTE
1 The above diagram shows the connections between the MMC–IV and peripheral devices. For
2 Devices marked by an asterisk “*” are used only for application download only. These devices
cannot be used for incorporating units.
3 The MMC–IV board cannot be used on the 15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.
93
5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND INPUT
UNIT CONNECTION B–62073E/04
5 POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND INPUT UNIT CONNECTION
94
B–62073E/04 UNIT CONNECTION
5.1
POWER SUPPLY
UNIT PANEL LAYOUT
CP1 (AC INPUT 200V to 240V)
F1 (AC INPUT FUSE) F2 (AC INPUT FUSE)
CP2 (AC OUTPUT) CP3 (AC OUTPUT)
Key location
PIL (PILOT LAMP)

CP8 (BATTERY) ALM (ALARM LAMP)
CP4 (POWER
CONTROL)
6–pin connector
CP5 (+24V OUTPUT) CP6 (+24E OUTPUT)
F3 (+24V FUSE 3.2A) F4 (+24E FUSE 5A)
Fig. 5.1 (a) For power unit A02B–0162–H101 or –H102
CAUTION
Connector compatibility
CP1
CP2 COMPATIBLE
CP3 INCOMPATIBLE (key groove on the connector
CP4 prevents erroneous connection)
CP5
CP6
95
CP1 (AC INPUT 200V to 240V)
3 G
2 S
F1 (AC INPUT
FUSE) 1 R
CP2 (AC OUTPUT)

CP3 (AC OUTPUT)
3 G 3 G
2 200B 2 200B
1 200A 1 200A
Key
location
CP8 (BATTERY) PIL (PILOT LAMP)
1 +VB ALM (ALARM LAMP)
2 0V CP4 (POWER CONTROL)

6–pin connector
B3 FB A3 COM
B2 FA A2 OFF
CP5 (+24V OUTPUT)
B1 AL A1 ON
3
2 0V CP6 (+24E FUSE 5A)
1 +24V 3
2 0V
1 +24E
F3 (+24V FUSE)
F4 (+24E FUSE 5A)
AI 3.2A
BI 5.0A
Fig. 5.1 (b) For power unit A02B–0162–H107 or –H108
CAUTION
Connector compatibility
CP1
CP2 COMPATIBLE
CP3 INCOMPATIBLE
CP4 (key groove on the
CP5 connector prevents
erroneous connection)
CP6
96
5.2
CONNECTING THE
POWER SUPPLY
UNIT
5.2.1 The power supply unit of the Series 15–B has the power on/off control
When an Input Unit is function. The power supply unit of the Series 15–B therefore does not
need an input unit, which is necessary for the power supply unit of the
not Used Series 15–A, to control power on/off.
NOTE
When an input unit is not used, the capacity and the number
of connectors of the AC outputs for which power on/off is
controlled are shown in the figure below. When the capacity
or the number of connectors is insufficient, see section
5.2.3.
97
AMP (Japan)
2–178288–3 (Housing)
1–175218–5 (Contact)
9″ monochrome CRT (only 1 unit)

9″ PDP
9.5″ LCD
AMP (Japan) 10.4″ LCD
1–178288–33 (Housing)
1–175218–5 (Contact)
(1) CP1
The AC input connector for the control unit. The AC input
specifications are as follows:
R and S: 200 to 240 VAC +10%/–15%, 1f , 50 Hz/60 Hz " 3 Hz
G: Grounding (class 3 or better)
NOTE
The above specifications may be limited depending on the
device powered from CP2 or CP3.
(2) CP2 and CP3

The connectors for AC outputs for which power on/off is synchronized
with the power on/off of the control unit.
The AC output specifications are the same as the AC input for CP1.
The AC input specifications for CP1 may be limited depending on the
AC input specifications for a device connected to CP2 or CP3.
98
Example) When a device of 200/220 VAC (which does not accept 240
V) is connected to CP2, the AC input specification for CP1
is also 200/220 VAC.
The total AC output from CP2 and CP3 is up to 2.5 A.
When the capacity is insufficient, see section 5.2.3.
(3) CP4
The connector for controlling the power. The power–on and
power–off buttons are connected here.
(a) Power on/off (EON, EOF, and COM)
Turns on and off the power to the control unit.
(Time conditions)
TON TOFON
Between Shorted TON y 500msec

EON Open TOFF y 500msec
and COM TOFF
TOFON y 5sec
Between Shorted
EOF and Open
COM (Power is on.) (Power is off.) (power is on.)
(Contact specifications)
Withstand voltage: 50 VDC or higher (between the contacts)
Withstand current: 100 mA or higher (The minimum load is 2
mA or lower.)
(b) Alarm input (AL and OFF)
Receives an alarm signal from outside the control unit to turn off
the power to the system. Input a contact signal which is closed
when an alarm occurs.
(Contact specifications)
Withstand voltage: 30 VDC or more (between the contacts)
Withstand current: 100 mA or more (The minimum load is 1
mA or less.)
(c) Alarm output (FA and FB)
Shorts FA and FB when an abnormality is found in the power
supply unit for the control unit, for example, when the fuse for
direct current output blows or when an excessive voltage or current
is detected at the direct current output. When an alarm input
(between AL and OFF) is closed, FA and FB are also shorted. This
signal is held until the power–off button is pressed or the input
power (AC input of the power supply unit) is turned off. When this
signal is output, the power to the control unit is turned off and the
power–on button is disabled.
(Contact ratings) 50 VDC or less
0.5 A or less
50 VAC or less
5 VA or less
(4) CP5
+24 VDC power output
Connector for +24 VDC power displays (9″ CRT/PDP, 9.5″ LCD,
10.4″ LCD)
99
(5) CP6
The connector for the +24 VDC power output for the machine
interface I/O (connection unit, operator’s panel connection unit, etc.).
The DC output supplied from CP6 is up to 3 A.
5.2.2 The power supply unit of the Series 15–B has the power on/off control
function.
When an Input Unit is
However, when an external input unit is used, the power–on and
Used power–off buttons may not be connected to the power supply unit. In this
case, the following connection is recommended. The signals ON, OFF,
and COM are wired together. This means that the power supply unit
operates while its AC input power is supplied to CP1.
(1) For other than multiaxis machines
Power–on
External input unit and
power–off
buttons
CP1 (Input of 200 to 240 VAC)

AMP (Japan)
1–178128–3 200 to 240 VAC
1f , 50 Hz/60 Hz
CP4 (Power control) AMP (Japan)

2–178129–6
NOTE
As shown in the above figure, when external input unit
A14B–0076–B001 is used, the number of AC output
connectors for which power on/off is controlled increases
but the capacity of the AC input fuse in the input unit and that
in the power supply unit is the same (10 A for power supply
B1). This input unit therefore cannot be used in order to
increase the capacity of the AC output for which power
on/off is controlled.
100
When the A14B–0076–B001 is used as an input unit, connect the input

unit to the power supply unit as shown below.
Fuses
X
U, V, W Servo X
three–phase input X Magnetic contactor
200/220 VAC with power
Not on/off controlled MCC
200 to 240 VAC
used 0.3A
1f To servo
transformer
TP1
Y
Y
CP2 R, S, G
ON CP1 Series 15–B
EON (6P, black)
OFF EOF
COM
FA
FB CP2–1 CP1–1
R
TP2 CP2–2 S CP1–2
CP2–3 G CP1–3
CP2–5 PA
CP2–6 PB
The input unit is within the dotted lines.

200 to 240 VAC with power
TP1 and TP2: M4 screw terminals on/off controlled
NOTE
Refer to the Series 15–A Connection Manual for details of
the input unit connectors.
101
(2) For multiaxis machines

When using multi–axis machines, be sure to use the input unit as two
power supply units are controlled.
When A14B–0076–B401 (15–MB for multiaxis machines) is used as
the input unit, it is connected to the power unit as follows:
FS15–MODEL B Main FA15–MODEL B Multiple

cabinet axis input unit
Power supply unit

CPI (AC input) CPDI (AC output)
CP4 (Power supply

control)
CPD2B (Power supply

control)
FS15–MODEL B Additional
cabinet
Power supply unit CPD2C (Power supply

CPI (AC input) control)
CP4 (Power supply

control)
CPD2A (Power supply

control)
POWER
(Note) BUTTON
ON
POWER
BUTTON OFF
ALARM INPUT
HOUSING
AMP (JAPAN)
CONTACT
ALARM OUTPUT
102
5.2.3 Through the CP2 and CP3 connectors, the power supply unit can output
When AC Output a total AC current of up to 2.5 A subject to power on/off is control.
When the number of connectors or the capacity of the output from the
Terminals for Which power unit is insufficient, the following connection is recommended:
Power On/Off is
Controlled are
Insufficient
Power supply unit

200 to 240 VAC, 1f
AMP (Japan) Ground M4 screw
CP3 (AC output) terminals
1–178128–3 (Housing)
3 G
1–175218–5 (Contact) R S
2 200B CP91
1 200A 3 G 10A
Y
Y
FCI Japan 2 200B
SMS3PWS–5 (Housing) 1 200A
RC16M–SCT3 (Contact)
Expanded power input unit
CP92 CP93 CP94 CP95 CP96
FCI Japan
SMS3PWS–5 (Housing)
RC16M–SCT3 (Contact)
Pin assignment layout for the

CP92 to CP96 connectors
200 to 240 VAC with power
3 G
on/off controlled
2 200B
1 200A
Expanded input unit : A14B–0076–B209
103
5.2.4 Power ON the power supplies in the following order or simultaneously:

Power ON Sequence
1 Power supply (200 VAC) for entire machine tool
2 Power supply (I/O Unit–MODEL A, etc.) for slave I/O
devices connected via I/O Link and power supply (24 VDC)
for servo amplifier
3 Power supply (200 VAC) for control unit
Leave the memory backup battery and separate absolute pulse coder
battery connected regardless of the ON/OFF state of the control unit
power supply. If these batteries are removed with the control unit turned
OFF, parameters, part programs, pulse coder position data and other data
stored on the control unit will be lost.
For details, see “3.7.3 Replacing the battery.”
5.2.5 Power OFF the power supplies in the following order:

Power OFF Sequence
1 Power supply (200 VAC) for control unit
2 Power supply (I/O Unit–MODEL A, etc.) for slave I/O
devices connected via I/O Link and power supply (24 VDC)
for servo amplifier
3 Power supply (200 VAC) for entire machine tool
The motor cannot be controlled when the power is turned OFF or if a

power interruption occurs. Adopt the required corrective action on the
machine tool for trouble that arises from the inability to control the motor.
For example, insert a brake to prevent the shaft from falling when the shaft
operating in the gravity shaft direction is being controlled. The brake
clamps the motor when the servo has not started up or when the motor is
not operating, and unclamps the motor only while it is operating. In other
words, the servo motor is normally clamped when a power OFF or power
interruption prevents servo axis control. The axis being controlled may
fall in the time up to activation of the motor clamp relay. So, you must
evaluate whether or not the amount that the axis falls is a problem.
NOTE
When the MMC–IV and intelligent terminal are used, shut
down the OS before you turn the control unit OFF. If the
power is turned OFF during accessing of the hard disk or
while the operating system is still running, data on the hard
disk is more likely to be damaged. Avoid this at all costs.
104
5.3
CONNECTION OF
INPUT UNIT FOR
STANDALONE
CABINET A
5.3.1
Input Unit Layout
Input PCB Input fuse for servo amp.
Input fuse for control unit
Input Unit
(A14B–0076–B004, B005, B008)
5.3.2 (1) Terminal Unit TP1

Connection to
U V W
Input Units GND
(A14B–0076–B004, f f f f AC200/220V 3f 60Hz

or AC200V 3f 50Hz
–B005, and –B008)
M5 screw Terminal ×4
These terminals are for AC power input. The cabinet must be

equipped with a breaker or fuse to protect the wiring against
over–currents. Provide a ground of class 3 or higher.
105
(2) Terminal Unit TP2
EON EOF COM FA FB
f f f f f
(a) EON, EOF, COM : External power supply ON/OFF Terminal

The external power ON/OFF terminal is used to turn on and off the
power supplied from outside the control unit. The connection is as
follows:
EON
POWER
Input unit ON
EOF
POWER
OFF
COM
Remove this connection.
External power supply ON/OFF Signal
The following figure shows the timing chart according to which the
external power is turned on and off.
Tofon
EON–COM
EOF–COM
Ton Toff
(Power ON) (Power OFF)
Ton y 500msec
Toff y 500msec
Tofon y 5sec
The time chart of external power supply ON/OFF signal
The contacts used for turning on and off the external power must
conform to the following specifications:
Withstand voltage: 50 VDC or higher (between contacts)
Withstand current: 100 mA or higher (with minimum load of
2 mA or lower)
106
(b) FA and FB: Fuse alarm signal

A short circuit occurs between FA and FB if the fuse used in the
power unit of the NC blows or if an overvoltage or overcurrent is
detected at the DC output of the power unit. FA and FB are also
short–circuited if an alarm signal is input from CP6. The fuse
alarm signal is maintained until the power being supplied to the NC
is turned off or the OFF button is pressed.
When this signal is output, the NC power is turned off and the
POWER ON and EXTERNAL POWER ON buttons are disabled.
The connection is as follows:
Input Unit
Contact voltage rating
FA DC 50V or lower
DC 0.5V or lower
FB
AC 50V or lower
AC 5VA or lower
Fuse alarm signal
(3) Terminal Unit TP4
EMG EMG EMG EMG

R S IN1 IN2 OUT1 OUT2 EXR EXS
f f f f f f f f
(a) R and S
These terminals are used for single–phase 200–VAC input to the
control unit. The connection is normally as follows:
TP4 F1
TP1
R S F2 U V W
Remove this connection when using separate sources for the

three–phase AC input (for the servo amplifier) and the
single–phase 200 VAC input (for the control unit).
107
(b) EMGIN1, 2 Note 1)

Connect to the 100–VAC (MCC) terminals of the servo amplifier,
as shown below:
Standalone cabinet
AC100 V Emergency stop
EMGIN1
To MCC terminals of
the servo amplifier in
the standalone cabinet
EMGIN2
Prepare an external 100–VAC power

source, and connect in series with the
emergency stop contactor.
(c) EMGOUT1, 2
Not used.
(d) EXR and EXS (Note)
These terminals are for ON/OFF–controlled, single–phase
200/220 VAC output. Connect this output to an electromagnetic
contactor such that the servo amplifier power source, installed
outside the cabinet, can be turned on and off together with the NC
power. The current must not exceed 0.3 mA.
NOTE
These terminals are used to connect the additional cabinet
when use of the timing control cable (A02B–0163–J101) is
specified. In this case, two cables may be connected to one
terminal.
(4) Connector CP4

When the cabinet is equipped with a built–in tape reader, this terminal
is connected to the tape reader at the factory. When the tape reader is
installed outside the cabinet, this terminal is used for power input.
108
5.3.3 The following units can be mounted in the standalone cabinet. Necessary
Connection to the control unit PCB connections are completed at the factory.
Control Unit Unit PCB Connector Function Remark
9″ monochrome PSU CP5 DC24V Note 1)

CRT unit MAIN JA1 CRT
MAIN JA2 MDI
Connection unit PSU CP6 DC24E Note 2)

PMC JD1A IOLINK
Tape reader MAIN JD5B RS232–2
Punch panel MAIN JD5A RS232–1
APC battery MAIN JA4A APCBAT

(1 pc only)
Servo amp. MAIN JV1 to 4 AMP1 to 4 Note 3)

SUB JV5 to 8 AMP5 to 8
PSU : Power supply unit

MAIN : Main CPU board
PMC: PMC board
SUB : Sub board
NOTE
1 Can be used for power input when the 9″ monochrome CRT
unit is installed outside the cabinet.
2 Can be used for power input when the connection unit is
installed outside the cabinet.
3 The connections to be made will change, depending on the
ordered specifications.
109
5.4
CONNECTION OF
INPUT UNIT FOR
STANDALONE
CABINET B
5.4.1
Input Unit Layout
Input Unit (A14B–0076–B411)
110
5.4.2 (1) Terminal Unit TB2 (M4 terminal)

Connection to Input (a) R, S
Unit (A14B–0076–B411) These terminals are for single–phase 200/220 VAC input to devices
to which power is supplied from the control unit (main and
additional lockers) and the input unit.
(b) 200A, 200B Note)
200/220 VAC output. Connect these terminals to an
electromagnetic contactor such that the servo amplifier power
source, installed outside the cabinet, can be turned on and off
together with the NC power.
NOTE
specified.
(c) INT1. INT2 Note)

These are the door interlock terminals, used for cabinets other than
standalone cabinet B. When the two terminals are open, the NC
power is off.
NOTE
specified.
(d) EON, EOF, COM1 : External power ON/OFF terminal

The external power ON/OFF terminal is used to turn on and off the
power supplied from outside the control unit. The connection is as
follows:
EON
POWER
Input unit ON
EOF
POWER
OFF
COM
Remove this connection.
External power supply ON/OFF Signal
The following figure shows the timing chart according to which the
external power is turned on and off.
111
Tofon
EON–COM
EOF–COM
Ton Toff
(Power ON) (Power OFF)
Ton y 500msec
Toff y 500msec
Tofon y 5msec
The time chart of external power supply ON/OFF signal
The contacts used for turning on and off the external power must
conform to the following specifications:
Withstand voltage: 50 VDC or higher (between contacts)
Withstand current: 100 mA or higher
(with minimum load of 2 mA or lower)
(e) EMGPIT1. 2
Not used.
(f) 200R1, 200S1, and COM2
These terminals are for input unit internal connections.
(2) Terminal unit TB3 (Faston terminal)
This is the door interlock terminal used for standalone cabinet B. The
terminal is used when use of the door interlock (A02B–0116–J001) is
specified.
(3) PCB1 (A17B–1600–0580)
(a) Connector CPD1 (AMP housing: 1–178128–3, contact:
1–175218–5)
This terminal is used to supply single–phase 200/220 VAC to the
main and additional lockers. These connections are made at the
factory.
(b) Connecter CPD2A
(A1 to A3: AMP Housing 2–178128–3, Contact 1–175218–2)
(B1 to B3: AMP Housing 2–178128–3, Contact 1–175218–2)
A1 ON B1 AL
A2 OFF B2 FA
A3 COM B3 FB
D ON, OFF, COM (A1 to A3)

These terminals are connected at the factory.
112
D FA, FB: Fuse alarm output signal (B1 to B3)

A short circuit occurs between FA and FB if the fuse used in the
power unit of the NC blows or if an overvoltage or overcurrent is
detected at the DC output of the power unit. FA and FB are also
short–circuited if an alarm signal is input from AL. The fuse alarm
signal is maintained until the power being supplied to the NC is
turned off or the OFF button is pressed.
When this signal is output, the NC power is turned off and the
POWER ON and EXTERNAL POWER ON buttons are
invalidated. The connection is as follows:
Input Unit
Contact voltage rating
FA DC 50V or lower
DC 0.5V or lower
FB
AC 50A or lower
AC 5VAor lower
Fuse alarm signal
(c) Connector CPD2B (AMP Housing 2–178129–6, Contact

1–175218–2)
This terminal is used for the control signals that turn on and off the
main locker power. The connection to the main cabinet is
completed at the factory.
(d) Connector CPD2C (AMP Housing 2–178129–6, Contact
1–175218–2)
This terminal is for the control signals that turn on and off the
additional locker power. The connection to the additional cabinet
is completed at the factory.
(4) PCB2 (A20B–1001–0210)
CP91 to CP96 (connector: FCI Japan, housing: SMS3PK–5, contact:
RC16M–23T3 or RC16M–SCT3)
(a) Connector CP91
This terminal is for ON/OFF–controlled, single–phase 200/220
VAC input. This connection is completed at the factory.
(b) Connector CP92
This terminal is connected to the 200A and 200B terminals of
terminal unit TB2.
(c) Connector CP93
This terminal is for power supply (120 W) to the cooling fan of the
stand–alone cabinet.
(d) Connector CP94
When the cabinet is equipped with a built–in tape reader, this
terminal is connected to the tape reader at the factory. When the
tape reader is installed outside the cabinet, this terminal is used for
power input.
Power requirement of built–in tape reader: 110 VA (without reel)
130 VA (with reel)
113
(e) Connector CP95, CP96

200/220 VAC output. They are used for power supply to external
units. The rating of each terminal must be set such that the total of
the ratings of CP92 to PC96 does not exceed 1.4 kVA.
5.4.3 The following units can be mounted in stand–alone cabinet B and

additional lockers. All necessary PCB connections in the control unit (of
Connection to Control
the main and additional lockers) are completed at the factory.
Unit
Unit Lockers PCB Connector Function Remark
9″ monochrome CRT unit MAIN PSU CP5 DC24V Note 1)

MAIN MAIN JA1 CRT
MAIN MAIN JA2 MDI
Connection unit MAIN PSU CP6 DC24E Note 2)

MAIN PMC JD1A IOLINK
Tape reader MAIN MAIN JD5B RS232–2
Punch panel MAIN MAIN JD5A RS232–1
APC battery (1 pc only) ADD MAIN JA4A APCBAT
Servo amp. ADD AXIS JV1 to 4 AMP1 to 4 Note 3)
MAIN : Main Cabinet

PSU : Power supply unit
ADD : Additional Cabinet
MAIN : Main CPU board
PMC : PMC board
AXIS : Axis CPU board
NOTE
1 Can be used for power input when the 9″ monochrome CRT
unit is installed outside the cabinet.
2 Can be used for power input when the connection unit is
installed outside the cabinet.
3 The connections to be made will change, depending on the
ordered specifications.
114
5.5
CONNECTION OF
INPUT UNIT FOR
ADDITIONAL
CABINET A
5.5.1
Input Unit Layout
LC2 GND
U V W
Electromagnetic
Contactor
SK2
Spark
Killer
F17 F18 F19
Fuse for servo amp.
Terminal unit
f
T1 GND
TA
NOTE
Terminal unit T1 is not installed when using the
A02B–0075–J141 or –J144 input terminal.
115
Input unit order drawing numbers and unit drawing numbers
unit order drawing number unit drawing number
A02B–0075–J141, –J144 A02B–0075–C006
A02B–0075–J142, –J145 A02B–0075–C007
5.5.2 (1) Connection of three–phase power for the servo amplifier

Cable Connection
Connect the three–phase power for
[Connection to the the servo amplifier to these terminals
Input Unit (M6 screw terminals).
(A02B–0075–J141, U V W GND
AC200/220V 3f 60Hz
–J142, –J144, and

1 3 5
f or AC200V 3f 50Hz
–J145)] Electromagnetic Note) Provide a ground of

Contactor class 3 or higher.
LC2
2 4 6
Fuse
F17 to F19
Connected to the line filters or servo

terminal units.
(2) Terminal unit T1 (M4 screw terminal)

Not used.
(3) Terminal unit TA (M4 screw terminal)
f f f f f f f f f f f f
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
f f f f f f f f f f f f
IN OUT IN OUT DOOR INT. LOCK
100V 200V
The terminals of the upper row are used for connecting wires inside the
cabinet, and those of the lower row are used for connecting external
devices.
NOTE
In the following text, the terms “previous cabinet” and “next
cabinet” refer to the cabinets shown below:
116
Previous cabinet Previous cabinet Previous cabinet Previous cabinet

(the cabinet (the cabinet (the cabinet (the cabinet
connected before connected before connected before connected before
that being that being that being that being
considered) considered) considered) considered)
Additional Additional Main cabinet Additional Additional

cabinet cabinet cabinet cabinet
Next cabinet (the Next cabinet (the Next cabinet (the Next cabinet (the
cabinet connected cabinet connected cabinet connected cabinet connected
after that being after that being after that being after that being
considered) considered) considered) considered)
(a) Terminal 1 to 4
These terminals are for 100 VAC (MCC) connection for the servo
amplifier.
The connections are as follows:
To each servo amplifier in the cabinet
These terminals receive

100 VAC from the previous These terminals
cabinet, etc. Depending on supply 100 VAC to the
the previous cabinet, the next cabinet.
connection differs as These connections are
follows: made at the factory.
a. When the previous cabinet is an additional cabinet:

These connections are made at the factory.
b. When the previous cabinet is standalone cabinet A and the
timing control cable (A02B–0163–J101) is specified:
c. When the previous cabinet is stand–alone cabinet B:
Prepare an external 100–VAC power source and connect it in
series with the emergency stop contactor, as shown below.
117
EMERGENCY stop AC100 V

Contactor
(b) Terminal 5 to 8
These terminals are for ON/OFF–controlled single–phase 200 JAC
input, used for controlling the electromagnetic contactors for the
cabinet fan and servo amplifier power. Connections are as follows:
N
LC2
1c2
These terminals receive 200 These terminals supply

VAC from the previous 200 VAC to the next
cabinet, etc. Depending on cabinet. These
the previous cabinet, the connections are made
connection differs as at the factory.
follows:

b. When the previous cabinet is standalone cabinet A and the
c. When the previous cabinet is standalone cabinet B and the
118
(c) Terminal 9 to 12
These terminals are for the door interlock. The connections are as
follows:
When the door interlock

(A02B–0075–J052) is specified,
these connections are made at
the factory.
These terminals receive the door These terminals supply the door interlock signal
interlock signal from the previous to the next cabinet. When there is no “next
cabinet. Depending on the previous cabinet,” terminals 3 and 4 are short–circuited.
cabinet, the connection differs. These connections are completed at the factory.

b. When the previous cabinet is standalone cabinet A and the door
interlock (A02B–0076–J204) is specified:
Connections are completed at the factory.
c. When the previous cabinet is standalone cabinet B and the
119
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE B–62073E/04
6 CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO MACHINE INTERFACE
120
B–62073E/04 MACHINE INTERFACE
6.1 The Series 15–B can be combined with the units shown in the table below
as I/O units for the machine interface.
OUTLINE The I/O units for the FANUC I/O Link are installed separately from the
control unit, and connected with the control unit using the dedicated serial
FANUC I/O Link.
As shown in the figure below, two or more units can be installed
separately. By placing the connection unit for the operator’s panel near
the operator’s panel, an operator’s panel that inputs/outputs many signals
can be interfaced easily.
The FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A is a modular–type I/O unit. It selects
necessary modules from various I/O modules provided by FANUC
according to the application and uses them as one external unit. The
FANUC I/O Link transfers data between the control unit and such an
external unit at a high speed. The states of the input signals from the
machine are transferred to the control unit at regular intervals. The states
of the output signals from the control unit are transferred to external units
at regular intervals. (Note that this manual covers only part of the uses
that the FANUC I/O Link has. For example, although it can be used for
connecting the 1–axis CNC FANUC Power Mate or cell controller
FANUC F–D Mate, this manual does not mention it. This is because the
purpose of this manual is to describe the I/O units having machine
interface.)
Table 6.1 Machine interface I/O
Type Name DI/DO points
FANUC I/O Link FANUC I/O Unit – MODEL A Max. 256/256 per group
compatible I/O
FANUC I/O Unit – MODEL B (Note)
Max 1024/1024 in total
Max.
Operator’s Panel Connection Unit
Connection Unit
NOTE
Refer to FANUC I/O Unit – MODEL B Connecting Manual
(B–62123E).
121
FANUC Link Compatible I/O
FANUC
I/O Link
FANUC
Series 15–B I/O Link
Control Unit Operator’s Machine
panel con- Opera-
I/O Unit– I/O Unit– nection tor’s
Panel
MODEL A MODEL A unit
Machine Tool
Fig. 6.1 FANUC I/O Link compatible I/O
122
6.2 In the I/O Link there are the master station and its slave stations. The
master is the control unit of the CNC, and the slaves are the I/O unit and
CONNECTION OF interface unit for the operator’s panel. The slaves are divided into groups,
THE FANUC I/O LINK and up to 16 groups can be connected to one I/O Link. A maximum of
two base I/O unit–MODEL A can be connected as a group. The operator’s
panel connection unit and connection unit are each counted as one group.
The I/O Link is connected in different ways depending on the types of
units actually used and the I/O points. To connect the I/O Link, the
assignment and addresses of the I/O signals have been made
programmable with the PMC program. The maximum number of I/O
points is 1024.
The two connectors of the I/O link are named JD1A and JD1B, and are
common to all units. A cable is always connected from JD1A of a unit
to JD1B of the next unit. Although JD1B of the last unit is not used and
left open, it need not be connected with a terminator.
(A terminator is needed for the last interface module of each group of the
I/O Unit–MODEL A.)
The pin assignments of connectors JD1A and JD1B are common to all
units on the I/O Link, and are illustrated on the next page. Use the figures
when connecting the I/O Link irrespective of the type of unit.
123
CNC
Î Î
ÎÎ
JD1A
FANUC I/O Link

I/O = 256/256 or less per group
I/O = 1024/1024 or less in total
FANUC I/O Unit – MODEL A ×2 max
ÎÎ
Î
Base unit 1 Base unit 2
Î
ÎÎ
JD1B Magnetic
Î
ÎÎ
circuit
JD1A
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
JD1B
JD1A
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
JD1B
JD1A
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ JD1B
Connection Connection
Î
ÎÎ JD1A unit 1 unit 2
Up to 16
groups
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ JD1B Operator’s panel Machine
Î
JD1A connection unit operator’s
panel
Fig. 6.2 I/O Link connection diagram
124
6.2.1 Control unit or preceding slave unit

Connection of FANUC
I/O Link by Electric
Cable
Next slave
unit
+5 V terminals are for an optical I/O link adapter. They are not necessary
when connecting with a metal cable.
CABLE WIRING
1 3
SIN SOUT
2 4
*SIN *SOUT
3 1
SOUT SIN
4 2
*SOUT *SIN
11 11
0V 0V
12 12
0V 0V
13 13
0V 0V
14 14
0V 0V
SHIELD
GROUND PLATE
RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIAL

A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG×10–pair)
125
6.2.2 The FANUC I/O Link can be extended to the maximum length of 200 m
Connection of FANUC (when a relay is not used) with optical fiber cables using an optical I/O
link adapter.
I/O Link by Optical
Fiber Cable
NOTE
In the following cases, use an optical fiber cable.
D When the cable is more than 15 meters long.

D When the cable runs between different cabinets and it is impossible to
connect the cabinets with a grounding wire of 5.5 mm2 or thicker.
D When there is concern that the cable is influenced by strong noise; for
example :
When there is a strong electromagnetic noise source beside the cable
such as a welding machine.
When a noise generating cable such as a power cable runs for a long
distance in parallel with the cable.
(1) External dimension of optical link adapter
The standard type (A13B–0154–B001) and high–speed type
(A13B–0154–B002) are the same.
66.0
40.0
4–M3
Connector
for unit
connecting FANUC Optical connector
45.0
JD1 COP1
7.0
18.0
(2) Weight of optical link adapter

Main body: Approx. 100 g
126
(3) Connection
(a) Connection diagram
JD1 JD1
Unit Unit
JD1A JD1B
↑ ↑ ↑
COP1 COP1 Connecting
Connecting Optical
cable between
cable between cable
units
units ↑ ↑
Optical I/O Optical I/O
link adapter link adapter
(b) Interunit connecting cables
Unit side Adapter side

JD1A, JD1B JD1
(1) Recommended connector for cable side: PCR–E20FS (made by HONDA

Communication Co., Ltd.)
(2) Recommended cable (wire material): A66L–0001–0284#10P
(3) Cable length: Max. 2 m (when the recommended cable is used)
(c) Optical cable

(i) Specification: A66L – 6001 – 0009#L5R003 length 5 m
A66L – 6001 – 0009#L10R03 length 10 m
A66L – 6001 – 0009#L15R03 length 15 m
(ii)Cable length: Max. 200 m (standard type)
Max. 100 m (high–speed type)
127
NOTE
The minimum bending radius of the optical fiber cable is 25
mm. Take care not to excessively twist the optical fiber
cable.
(4) Maximum number of stages

When a conventional optical I/O link adapter (standard type) is used
on the I/O link, up to five stages can be connected. Up to 16 stages can
be connected when the high–speed type is used.
1) Standard type (A13B–0154–B001) Maximum number of stage: 5
2) High–speed type (A13B–0154–B002) Maximum number of
stages: 16
NC or Optical I/O Optical I/O NC or Optical I/O Optical I/O NC or

I/O Unit link adapter link adapter I/O Unit link adapter link adapter I/O Unit
1 stage
NOTE
High–speed type adapters cannot be mixed with standard
type adapters on the same line.
(5) Power source

(a) Power voltage: 4.75 V to 5.25 V (at the receiving end)
(b) Consumption current: 200 mA
(6) Installation conditions
(a) The optical link adapter enclosure is not fully sealed ; install it with
the CNC control unit in the fully enclosed cabinet.
(b) Ground the case using the case fixing screw of the optical link
adapter.
(c) The optical link adapter is light, and it may not be necessary to
mount it with screws. However, keep it from coming in contact
with other circuits to prevent possible short–circuits. When
mounting the optical link adapter in a cabinet, attach it with an
L–type fitting using the case fixing screws (M3) of the optical link
adapter.
L fifting
128
(7) Required parts

(a) For making up an I/O link using the optical link adapter, the
following parts are necessary:
(i) Optical I/O link adapter 2
(ii)Interunit connecting cable 2
(iii)Optical cable 1
(8) Relay using the optical fiber connection adapter
(a) External dimensions of optical fiber connection adapter
(b) Example of how to use the optical fiber connection adapter
Optical fiber connection

adapter Optical fiber cable
Optical fiber cable
Mounting plate
NOTE
Only one relay connection can be made.
The optical fiber connection adapter cannot be used when
high–speed type optical link adapters are used.
129
(c) Maximum transfer distance over the optical fiber cable

The following table shows the maximum transfer distance over the
optical fiber cable. This distances varies according to the number
of relay connections made using the connection adapter.
Number of Relays Maximum Transfer Distance
Standard type 0 200 m
1 100 m (total)
High–speed type 0 100 m
1 Not allowed
130
6.3 The FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A (“I/O unit”) is a modular–type I/O unit.
It interfaces the Series 16/18 with the machine when connected to the
CONNECTION OF control unit of the Series 15–B control unit via the I/O Link. One I/O unit
THE FANUC I/O can be configured by mounting the I/O modules required for either the 5–
UNIT–MODEL A or 10–slot base unit. A variety of I/O modules are provided so appropriate
modules can be selected according to the use, points, voltage level,
current capacity, and signal specifications. See Section 6.3.9 for further
information.
6.3.1
Structure of FANUC I/O
Unit–MODEL A
Base Unit ABU05A (5 slots) or ABU10A (10 slots)
I/F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Various I/O modules (Up to 10 modules)
Interface module AIF01A or AIF01B
AIF01A is used for connection to FANUC I/O Link

AIF01B expands I/O units in the same group.
131
6.3.2
Outer Dimensions
f 5 (mounting hole)
A B
For 5–slot base unit (ABU05A) 253 238
For 10–slot base unit (ABU10A) 430 415
6.3.3 Interface modules and various types of I/O modules can be mounted to
Mounting and and dismounted from the base unit easily as shown below.
Dismounting Modules (1) Mounting
(a) Hang the hook at the top of the module on the groove in the upper
side of the base unit.
(b) Make the connector of the module engage with that of the base unit.
(c) Push the module in the lower groove of the base unit till the stopper
in the lower side of the module stops.
132
(2) Dismounting
(a) Release the stopper by pushing the lever at the bottom of the
module.
(b) Push the module upwards.
133
6.3.4
Connection Diagram
Series 15–B
Control unit
JD1A
Terminator TX
I/O Unit–A I/O Unit–A
K1X AIF01A AIF01B
JD1B
JD1A JD3
JD2 JD2
CP32 CP32
DC24 V DC24 V
K2X
K1X
AIF01A AIF01B
Max. 16 JD1B
groups
JD1A JD3
JD2 JD2
CP32 CP32
DC24 V DC24 V
K2X
AIF01A AIF01B
K1X
JD1B
JD1A JD3
JD2 JD2
CP32 CP32
DC24 V DC24 V
K2X
134
NOTE
1 Number of I/O Units and connecting method are restricted
depending on the allocation of the I/O points.
See 6.2 “Connection of FANUC I/O Link” and 6.3.11
“Number of I/O points for the I/O Unit–MODEL A”.
2 Cable K1X can be an optical fiber cable by using the optical
I/O link adapter.
3 Terminate connector JD2 of the last interface module
(AIF01B) of the group by using a terminator. See 6.3.7, (3).
6.3.5 Connect the following power source to the connector CP32 of the
interface module (AIF01A or AIF01B).
Connecting Input
Power Source D Voltage : DC24 V " 10%
D Current : Determine from Table 6.3.6.
AIF01A / AIF01B FCI Japan tripolar

connector (Brown)
Housing: SMS3PNS–5
CP32
Contact: RC16M–SCT3
1 +24 V
2 GND DC24 V
3
NOTE
Turn ON the power for the I/O unit just before or when the
power for the CNC is turned ON. When the CNC power is
turned OFF, make sure to turn the power to the I/O unit OFF
as well.
ON
Power for the master
device OFF
ON
Power for the I/O unit
OFF
t : more than –500 ms (Turn ON of the power for I/O unit can be late 500 ms or less.)
135
6.3.6 (1) Ground the base unit (ABU05A, ABU10A) by its grounding terminal
Grounding
ABU05A, ABU10A ABU05B, ABU10B
M4 screw terminal
for grounding
SG terminal
(M3 screw terminal)
M4 mounting hole
for grounding
136
(2) When the cable K1X (see connection diagram in section 6.3.4) runs
between different cabinets, make sure to connect the cabinets with a
grounding wire more than 5.5 mm2.
Table 6.3.6 Required current of each module
Required current (mA) of +24 V

Mod le name
Module
A B
AIF01A 50
AIF01B 50
AID32A 20+0.5×n 30+7.5×n
AID32B 20+0.5×n 30+7.5×n
AID16C 5
AID16D 5
AID32E 5
AID32F 5
AIA16G 5+1.5×n
AOD08C 5+2×n
AOD08D 5+2×n
AOD16C 5+2×n
AOD16D 5+2×n
AOD32C 5+0.5×n
AOD32D 5+0.5×n
AOA05E 5+5.5×n
AOA08E 5+5.5×n
AOA12F 5+4.5×n
AOR08G 5 10×n
AOR16G 5 10×n
AAD04A 5 130
n: Number of the input and output points (for each module) which
turn ON simultaneously
D The current sum requirement for modules used in Column A should

not exceed 500 mA.
D The current sum requirement for modules used in Column B should
not exceed 1500 mA.
137
6.3.7 Details of the cables K1X, K2X and the terminator shown in the general
Connecting Signal connection diagram are as follows.
Cables (1) Cable K1X
CNC or AIF01A AIF01A
Connector HONDA TSUSIN

PCR–E20FS
(a) Use twisted pair wires for signal SIN and *SIN, and signals SOUT
and *SOUT.
(b) Recommended cable material:
A66L–0001–0284#10P (twisted pair/shielded)
(c) Shielding wires should be connected with the grounding plate of
the cabinet at the JD1A side using a cable clamp.
(d) Maximum cable length: 10 m
(e) Do not make any wire connections to the connector spare pins.
(f) Use an optical I/O link adapter and an optical fiber cable, [in the
following cases]:
138
(i) When the cable is more than 10 meters long.

(ii)When the cable runs between different cabinets and there is no
appropriate ground wire between the cabinets.
(iii)When there is concern that the cable is influenced by strong
noise.
(2) Cable K2X
AIF01A AIF01B

PCR–E20FS
(a) Connect the signals with the same name.

(b) Make sure to use twisted pair wires for the following signals:
S1 and *S1, S2 and *S2, S3 and *S3
S4 and *S4, S5 and *S5, S6 and *S6
139
(c) Do not connect the pins No. 10, No. 19 and No. 20, as they are used
internally.
(d) Recommended cable material:
A66L–0001–0284#10P (twisted pair/shielded)
(e) Maximum cable length: 2 m
(3) Terminator TX

PCR–E20FS
(a) Terminate the connector JD2 of the last AIF01B in a

single group with the terminator.
(b) Short–circuit the TRM1 signals as shown. Repeat the
shorting procedure for signals TRM2 and TRM3.
140
6.3.8 For an external connecting method, there are two types of I/O modules :
Connecting with I/O one with a terminal block, and one with a connector.
Modules
Terminal block type Connector type
Input/Output
display LED
A 0 . . . 7
B 0 . . . 7
Terminal
block cover
Connector
HONDA TSUSIN
MR–50RMA
M3.5 screw terminal (20 terminals)
(1) The terminal block is a removable type.

(a) Dismounting the terminal block
(i) Open the cover of the terminal block.
(ii)Push up the latch at the top of the terminal block.
(iii)Drag out the tab at the top of the terminal block and pull it out.
The terminal block will be removed from the module.
141
(b) Mounting the terminal block

(i) Insert the protruding portion at the bottom of the terminal block
in the groove of the module side.
(ii)Push the terminal block using the engaging point of the
protruding portion and the groove as an axis and mount it in the
module firmly.
(iii)Open the cover of the terminal block and check to make sure the
latch at the top of the terminal block is firmly set.
(2) Cautionary points when wiring terminal block type

(a) Wiring material: AWG22 to 18 (0.3 to 0.75mm2)
A wire as thin as possible is recommended.
(b) Crimp style terminal: M3.5
Crimp style terminal with no insulation
sleeve and a short distance “A”, as
illustrated in the drawing below, is
recommended.
(c) Mark tube: As short a mark tube as possible ; cover crimped part
with the mark tube.
142
6.3.9 (1) Digital input modules

Digital Input/Output
Module
External
Module Rated Rated Response LED
Input type Polarity Points connec-
name voltage current time display
tion
Maximum not
AID32A 24 VDC 7.5 mA Both 32 Connector
Non– 20 ms provided
insulation
DC input Maximum not
AID32B 24 VDC 7.5 mA Both 32 Connector
2 ms provided
Maximum Terminal
AID16C 24 VDC 7.5 mA NEG 16 provided
20 ms block
Maximum Terminal
AID16D 24 VDC 7.5 mA POS 16 provided
Insulation 20 ms block
type DC
input Maximum not
AID32E 24 VDC 7.5 mA Both 32 Connector
20 ms provided
Maximum not
AID32F 24 VDC 7.5 mA Both 32 Connector
2 ms provided
100 to 10.5 mA ON Max 35 ms Terminal

AC input AIA16G 16 provided
120 VAC (120 VAC) OFF Max 45 ms block
NOTE
1 Polarity
Negative: 0 V common (current source type)
The input is defined as ON when at a low level
Positive: 24 V common (current sink type)
The input is defined as ON when at a high level
2 For the details of the specifications for each module, refer to FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A
Connection/Maintenance Manual (B–61813E).
143
(2) Digital output modules

Output Module Rated Rated Points/ External LED
Polarity Points Fuse
type name voltage current common connection display
Terminal
AOD08C 2A NEG 8 8 provided provided
block
Terminal
AOD08D 2A POS 8 8 provided provided
block
Terminal not
AOD16C 0.5A NEG 16 8 provided
Insulation block provided
12 to 24
type DC
VDC Terminal not
output
AOD16D 0.5A POS 16 8 provided
block provided
not not
AOD32C 0.3A NEG 32 8 Connector
provided provided
not not
AOD32D 0.3A POS 32 8 Connector
provided provided
Terminal
AOA05E 2A — 5 1 provided provided
block
100 to 240
VAC Terminal
AC
AOA08E 1A — 8 4 provided provided
output block
100 to 120 Terminal

AOA12F 0.5A — 12 6 provided provided
VAC block
Terminal not
AOR08G 4A — 8 1 provided
Maximum block provided
Relay
250 VAC/
output Terminal not
30 VDC
AOR16G 2A — 16 4 provided
block provided
NOTE
1 Polarity
Negative: 0 V common (current sink type)
Output is at low level when ON.
Positive: 24 V common (current source type)
Output is at high level when ON.
2 For the details of the specifications for each module, refer to FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A
Connection/Maintenance Manual (B–61813E).
144
6.3.10
Correspondence
between I/O Signals Bit
Address in
and Addresses in a the module
Module 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Module of
8 points
0 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0
Module of
16 points
1 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
2 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0 Module of
32 points
3 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Addresses in a module are defined relatively, with the beginning address

as 0. Real addresses viewed by the sequence program of the PMC are set
by the programmer.
For input modules, an input signal becomes “1” when the contact point
connected with the input is turned ON. For output modules, an output
contact point (or transistor) is turned ON when the output signal is “1”.
6.3.11 Determine the number of I/O points for the I/O Unit–MODEL A using the
following.
Number of I/O Points
for I/O Unit–MODEL A (1) Output points
Sum of the actual output Occupied output points
points in a group
D 0 to 32 ‡ 32 points
D 72 to 128 ‡ 128 points
D 136 to 256 ‡ 256 points
NOTE
Count AOA05E as 8 points and AOA12F as 16 points.
(2) Input points

Sum of the actual input Occupied input points
points in a group
D 72 to 128 ‡ 128 points
D 136 to 256 ‡ 256 points
145
However, as a result of the calculation above, when the number of

input points is not larger than that of the output points in a single
group, the number of input points is assumed to be equal to that of
the output points.
Example 1: When the following modules are used in the group
No. 0
AOD32C 3 AID32A 5
AOA12F 2 AIA16G 3
[Output points]
32×3+16×2 = 128 ‡ 128 points
[Input points]
32×5+16×3 = 208 ‡ 256 points
Example 2: When the following modules are used in the group
No. 2.
AOD16C 7 AID16C 4
AOA05E 9 AIA16G 3
[Output points]
16×7+8×9 = 184 ‡ 256 points
[Input points]
16×4+16×3 = 112 ‡ 128 points
In this case, as the number of input points is smaller than that of the
output points, the number of input points is assumedl to be equal
to that of the output points, in other words, 256 points.
146
6.4 A connection unit (A20B–1005–0310 or A20B–1003–0200) is

connected to the control unit of the Series 15–B via FANUC I/O Link and
CONNECTING THE used for interfacing with the machine.
CONNECTION UNIT Electrical interfaces and pin assignment for connectors C01 to C05 and
C09 to C13 used for interfacing with the machine are fully compatible
with the connection unit of the Series 15–A. The numbers of input and
output points for each configuration are listed below.
Name Ordering code Input Output
Connection unit 1 A02B–1005–0310 96 64
Connection unit 1 A20B–1005–0310

+ + 192 128
Connection unit 2 A20B–1003–0200
Ground the connection unit 1/2.
M4 screw
147
Connection unit 1
A20B–1005–0310
Series 15–B
control unit
or To the next device

I/O unit
If there is no equipment beyond this
connection unit, JD1A can remain open.
3–pin connector (brown)

manufactured by
FCI Japan
Housing: SMS3PNS–5
To the machine
Connection unit 2
A20B–1003–0200
Power input specifications

Voltage: 24 VDC " 10%
Capacity: 670 + 7.3 × n (mA): When only connection unit 1 is
used
1150 + 7.3 × n (mA): When connection unit 1 and
connection unit 2 are used
n: Number of input points which are simultaneously turned
on
Use a 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) wire or thicker for the power
cable.
148
6.4.1 (a) Between CP52 and CP55

Connecting
Connection Unit 1 and
Connection Unit 2
CP52 CP55
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
+5 V +5 V 0V 0V +24 V +24 N +5 V +5 V 0V 0V +24 V +24 N
Connectors SMS6PN–5
Use a 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) wire or thicker for the power cable.
149
(b) Between CDD1 and CDD2
Connection Unit 1 Connection Unit 2
CDD1 CDD2
FAP–50–1 FAP–50–1
A01 0V B01 0V A01 0V B01 0V

A02 B02 A02 B02
A03 B03 A03 B03
A04 0V B04 A04 0V B04
A05 B05 A05 B05

Cable
A06 B06 0V A06 B06 0V
A07 *D7 B07 *D6 A07 *D7 B07 *D6

A08 *D5 B08 *D5 A08 *D5 B08 *D5
A09 0V B09 *D3 A09 0V B09 *D3
A10 *D2 B10 *D1 A10 *D2 B10 *D1
A11 *D0 B11 0V A11 *D0 B11 0V
A12 0V B12 0V A12 0V B12 0V
A13 AU B13 A4 A13 AU B13 A4
A14 A3 B14 0V A14 A3 B14 0V
A15 A2 B15 A1 A15 A2 B15 A1
A16 A0 B16 0V A16 A0 B16 0V
A17 *OE B17 0V A17 *OE B17 0V
A18 0V B18 0V A18 0V B18 0V
A19 *DVWE B19 0V A19 *DVWE B19 0V
A20 0V B20 A20 0V B20
A21 0V B21 0V A21 0V B21 0V

A22 *ALRO B22 0V A22 *ALRO B22 0V
A23 *CLR B23 EN A23 *CLR B23 EN
A24 B24 0V A24 B24 0V
A25 *ASIO B25 A25 *ASIO B25
The following cable is available.

Name Ordering code Length
Cable A02B–0072–K818 150mm
Maximum wire length: 1 m

Connectors at the ends of the cable:
FAS–50–17 (A63L–0001–0209#50)
150
6.4.2 Input signals for the connection unit conform to a non–insulation type
Input Signal interface. There are two input types: Direct current input signal A and
direct current input signal B.
Regulations for the
(1) Direct current input signal A
Connection Unit
Direct current input signal A is a signal sent to the CNC from the
machine, e.g., from a button, limit switch, relay contact, or proximity
switch.
(a) The contacts on the machine must meet the following
requirements:
Contact capacity: 30 VDC, 16 mA or more
Leakage current between contacts when the circuit is open: 1 mA
or less (Voltage: 26.4 V)
Voltage drop between contacts when the circuit is closed: 2 V or
less (Current: 8.5 mA)
(Including the voltage drop through the cable)
(b) Fig. 6.4.2 (a) shows the receiver circuit for the signal.
Machine CNC
Direct Receiver
current input output
signal signal
Filter and level
convention circuit
R Logical 0 when the
contact is open
Logical 1 when the
contact is closed
+24 V
Receiver circuit
Fig. 6.4.2 (a) Receiver circuit
Fig. 6.4.2 (b) shows the time specifications for the signal.
(Signal) (Signal)
Logical 1
Direct current (18 V or more)
input signal closed
Open Logical 0
(6 V or less)
Chattering of 5 ms or less is ignored
Receiver output signal
5 to 22 ms 5 to 22 ms
Fig. 6.4.2 (b) Width and delay time of the input signal
151
(2) Direct current input signal B

Direct current input signal B is a signal sent from the machine to the
CNC and used at high speed.
requirements:
Leakage current between contacts when the circuit is open:
1 mA or less (Voltage: 26.4 V)
Voltage drop between contacts when the circuit is closed:
2 V or less (Current: 8.5 mA)
(b) Fig. 6.4.2 (c) shows the receiver circuit for the signal.
Machine CNC
Receiver
output
Filter and level
conversion circuit
R
+24 V
Output transistor
Receiver circuit
Fig. 6.4.2 (c) Receiver circuit

As shown in Fig. 6.4.2 (c), the common voltage for the connection
unit can be selected from +24 V and 0 V by the wiring on the
machine.
(a) To use the connection unit with the +24 V common voltage
Connect Ü A with Ü B and Ü C with Ü D . Logical 0 when the
transistor is off. Logical 1 when the transistor is on.
(b) To use with the 0 V common voltage
Connect Ü A with Ü D and Ü B with Ü C . Logical 1 when the
transistor is off. Logical 0 when the transistor is on.
Fig. 6.4.2. (d) shows the time specifications for the signal.
Direct current Logical 1 Logical 0

input signal (18 V or higher) (6 V or lower)
ON
OFF Logical 0 Logical 1
(6 V or higher) (18 V or lower)
(For +24 V common) (For 0 V common)
Receiver
output signal
2 ms max 2 ms max
Fig. 6.4.2 (d) Width and delay time of the input signal
152
6.4.3 The output signals from the connection unit are used for driving relays and
Output Signal light emitting diodes for indication on the machine. A semiconductor
contact is used as a driver. The output type is direct current output signal
Regulations for the A.
Connection Unit
(1) Direct current output signal A
(a) Driver ratings
(i) Maximum load current when the output is on: 250 mA or less
including an instantaneous value
(ii)Maximum voltage drop when the output is on: 6IL (volts),
where IL is the load current
(Example) When IL = 250 mA, 6 × 0.25 = 1.5 (V)
(iii)Withstand voltage when the output is off: 50 V or less including
an instantaneous value
(iv) Leakage current when the output is off: 100 mA or less
Machine
CNC
Relay
Regulated power
Semicon- supply on the
ductor machine
contact
(b) When an inductive load such as a relay is connected to the machine,

mount a spark killer as near the load as possible (20 cm or less).
When a capacitive load is connected to the machine, insert a serial
resistor to limit the current so that the rated current and voltage are
ensured even for an instantaneous value.
(c) When the lamp is turned on directly by the solid–state relay output,
a surge current may flow and damage the driver. Add a protective
circuit shown below so that the rated current and voltage are
ensured even for an instantaneous value.
Lamp
+
CNC
Regulated power
Semicon- supply
ductor Protective resistor
153
6.4.4 (1) Connection unit 1

Connector Pin
Assignment for the
Connection Unit
C01 MR–50RMA
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
DIB5 DIB1 DIB6 DI44 DI40 DI45 DI16 DI60
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
0V DIB7 DIB4 DI26 DI37 DI06 DI33 DI50 DI62 51
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
+24 DIB2 DIB0 DIB3 COMI1 DI32 DI36 DI31 DI35 DI30 DI34 DI63 DI61 DI56
C02 MR–50RMA
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
DI52 DI65 DI64 DI91 DI92 DI95 DI41 DI77 DI47 DI46 DI73 DI74 DI53 DI67 DI05 DI15 DI25
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
DI93 DI94 DI90 DI22 DI12 DI02 DI97 DI55 DI43 DI42 DI82 DI81 DI80
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
+24 DI07 DI17 DI27 DI23 DI13 DI03 DI96 DI57 DI70 DI71 DI72 DI00 DI01 DI10 DI11 DI20 DI21
C03 MR–50RMA
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
DIA0 DIA1 DIA2 DI80 DI81 DI82 DI85 DI86 DI66 DI87 DIA7 DIA6 DO26 COM12 DO27 COM13
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
DIA3 DIA4 DIA5 DI83 DO67 DO66 DO65 DO64 DO63 DO62 DO61 DO60 DO22 COM17
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
+24V DI04 DI14 DI24 DI84 DI54 DI75 DI76 DO77 DO76 DO75 DO74 DO73 DO72 DO71 DO70 DO23 COM18
C04 MR–50RMA
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
DO04 0V 0V 0V DO03 COM1 COM16 DO57 DO55 DO54 DO56 DO12 MOM6 COM10 DO24 COM3
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
COM4 DO01 DO30 DO31 DO32 DO33 COM14 DO13 DO21 COM9 COM5 COM2 COM11 DO07
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
DO05 DO10 DO00 DO02 DO34 DO35 DO36 DO37 DO20 COM7 DO17 DO11 DO06 DO25 COM8 DO14 DO15 DO16
C05 MR–20RMA
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
COM15 COM15
8 9 10 11 12 13
DO40 DO41 DO42 DO43 DO44 DO45
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
DO46 DO47 DO50 DO51 DO52 DO53
154
(2) Connection unit 2

C09 MR–50RMA
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
DI75 DI71 DI76 DI104 DI100 DI105 DID6 DI102
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
0V DI177 DI174 DIE6 DIF7 DIC6 DIF3 DI110 DI122 DI111
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
+24 DI172 DI170 DI173 COM12 DIF2 DIF6 DIF1 DIF5 DIF0 DIF4 DI123 DI121 DI116
C10 MR–50RMA
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
DI112 DI125 DI124 DI151 DI152 DI155 DI101 DI137 DI107 DI106 DI133 DI134 DI113 DI127 DIC5 DID5 DIE5
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
DI153 DI154 DI150 DIE2 DID2 DIC2 DI157 DI115 DI103 DI102 DI142 DI141 DI140
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
+24 DIC7 DID7 DIE7 DIE3 DID3 DIC3 DI156 DI117 DI130 DI131 DI132 DIC0 DIC1 DID0 DID1 DIE0 DIE1
C11 MR–50RMA
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
DI160 DI161 DI162 DI140 DI141 DI142 DI145 DI146 DI126 DI147 DI167 DI166 DOA6 COM30 DOA7 COM31
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
DI163 DI164 DI165 DI143 DOE7 DOE6 DOE5 DOE4 DOE3 DOE2 DOE1 DOE0 DOA2 COM35
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
+24 DIC4 DID4 DIE4 DI144 DI114 DI135 DI136 DOF7 DOF6 DOF5 DOF4 DOF3 DOF2 DOF1 DOF1 DOA3 COM36
C12 MR–50RMA
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
DO84 0V 0V 0V DO83 COM19 COM34 DOD7 DOD5 DOD4 DOD6 DO92 COM24 COM28 DOA4 COM21
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
COM22 DO81 DOB0 DOB1 DOB2 DOB3 COM32 DO93 DOA1 COM27 COM27 COM20 COM29 DO87
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
DO85 DO90 DO80 DO82 DOB4 DOB5 DOB6 DOB7 DOA0 COM25 DO97 DO91 DO86 DOA5 COM26 DO94 DO95 DO96
C13 MR–20RMA
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
COM33 COM33
19 20 21 22 23 24
DOC0 DOC1 DOC2 DOC3 DOC4 DOC5
33 34 35 36 37 38 39
DOC6 DOC7 DOD0 DOD1 DOD2 DOD3
155
6.4.5
Details of the
Connection between
the Connection Unit
and the Machine
Connection unit 1
Address number
Connector pin Bit number
number
Direct current
input signal A
NOTE
The machine tool builder can determine address number n.
156
Connection unit 1
Address number
number
Direct current
input signal A
NOTE
157
Connection unit 1
Address number
number
Direct current
input signal A
NOTE
DI82 to DI80 are assigned to two connector pins each.
158
Connection unit 1
Address number
number
Direct current
input signal B
NOTE
The common voltage for DIB7 to DIB0 can be selected from +24 V and 0 V by the wiring on
the machine. The above figure shows the connection when the +24 V common voltage is used.
The common voltage is common to DIB7 to DIB0. It is therefore not possible to use a signal
with the +24 V common voltage and another signal with the 0 V common voltage.
159
Connection unit 1
Connector pin
Bit number
number
Address number
Direct current
input signal A
NOTE
The machine tool builder can determine address number m.
The common voltages for DO05 to DO00 are connected in connection unit 1 (COM1).
160
Connection unit 1
Connector pin
Bit number
number
Address number
Direct current
input signal A
NOTE
161
Connection unit 1
Connector pin
Bit number number
Address number
Direct current
input signal A
NOTE
The common voltages for DO21, DO20, and DO37 to DO30 are connected in connection unit
1 (COM14).
162
Connection unit 1
Bit number Connector pin

Address number number
Direct current
input signal A
NOTE
The common voltages for DO22 and DO67 to DO60 are connected in connection unit 1
(COM17).
The common voltages for DO23 and DO77 to DO70 are connected in connection unit 1
(COM18).
163
Connection unit 1

C05 (15)
Direct current
input signal A
NOTE
The common voltages for DO47 to DO40 and DO53 to DO50 are connected in connection unit
1 (COM15).
164
Connection unit 2
Address number
Connector pin number Bit number
Direct current
input signal A
NOTE
165
Connection unit 2
Address number
Connector pin number
Bit number
Direct current
input signal A
NOTE
166
Connection unit 2
Address number
Direct current
input signal A
NOTE
DI142 to DI140 are assigned to two connector pins each.
167
Connection unit 2
Address number
Direct current
input signal A
NOTE
The common voltage for DI177 to DI170 can be selected from +24 V and 0 V by the wiring on
the machine. The above figure shows the connection when the +24 V common voltage is used.
The common voltage is common to DI177 to DI170. It is therefore not possible to use a signal
with the +24 V common voltage and another signal with the 0 V common voltage.
168
Connection unit 2

number
Address number
Direct current input

signal A
NOTE
169
Connection unit 2

number
Address number
Direct current
input signal A
NOTE
170
Connection unit 2

number
Address number
Direct current
input signal A
NOTE
The common voltages for DOA1, DOA0, and DOB7 to DOB0 are connected in connection unit
2 (COM32).
The common voltages for DOD7 to DOD4 are connected in connection unit 2 (COM34).
171
Connection unit 2

number
Address number
Direct current
input signal A
NOTE
The common voltages for DOA2 and DOE7 to DOE0 are connected in connection unit 2
(COM35).
The common voltages for DOA3 and DOF7 to DOF0 are connected in connection unit 2
(COM36).
172
Connection unit 2

Direct current
input signal A
NOTE
The common voltages for DOC7 to DOC0 and DOD3 to DOD0 are connected in connection
unit 2 (COM33).
173
6.4.6
External View of the
Connection Unit
174
6.5 The operator’s panel connection unit (A16B–2200–0660, 0661) is

connected to the Series 15–B control unit through the FANUC I/O Link
CONNECTION OF and is used for interfacing with the machine operator’s panel.
OPERATOR’S PANEL The electric interface and pin layout of the connectors CM1 to CM4 are
CONNECTION UNIT fully compatible with those for Series 15–A. There are two units available
depending on the number of I/O points.
Specification Input Output
A16B–2200–0660 96 64
A16B–2200–0661 64 32
Operator‘s panel connection unit

A16B–2200–0660,0661
Series 15–B control unit
JD1A
JD1B JD1A To next device
or I/O unit
If there is no equipment beyond
this connection u nit, JD1A can
remain open.
DC24 V CP61 CM1
BURNDY 3P CONNECTOR CM2

(Brown)
Housing: SMS3PNS–5 Machine
operator’s
Contact: RC16M–SCT3 CM3 panel
1 +24 V
2 GND CM4
3
Power supply input specification

Voltage: 24 VDC" 10%
Capacity:500 + 7.3 × n mA
n: number of inputs ON simultaneously
Grounding of the operator’s panel connection unit
Ground mounting plate.
175
6.5.1 Input signals for the operator’s panel connection unit conform to a
Input Signal non–insulation type interface. The input type is direct current input signal
A.
Regulations for the
(1) Direct current input signal A
Operator’s Panel
Direct current input signal A is a signal sent to the CNC from the
Connection Unit machine, e.g., from a button, limit switch, relay contact, or proximity
switch.
requirements:
Leakage current between contacts when the circuit is open: 1 mA
or less (Voltage: 26.4 V)
Voltage drop between contacts when the circuit is closed: 2 V or
less (Current: 8.5 mA)
(b) Fig. 6.5.1 (a) shows the receiver circuit for the signal.
Machine CNC
Direct
current Receiver
input signal output
signal
Filter and level
conversion circuit
R Logical 1 when
the contact is
open
Logical 0 when
the contact is
+24 V closed
Receiver circuit
Fig. 6.5.1 (a) Receiver circuit
Fig. 6.5.1 (b) shows the time specifications for the signal.
(Signal) (Signal)
Logical 0
Direct current input (18 V or more)
signal closeed
Logical 1
Open (6 V or less)
Chattering of 5 ms
or less is ignoared
Receiver output signal
5 to 22 ms 5 to 22 ms
Fig. 6.5.1 (b) Width and delay time of the input signal
176
6.5.2 The output signals from the operator’s panel connection unit are used for
Output Signal driving lamps and light emitting diodes on the machine operator’s panel.
An NPN transistor is used as a driver. The output type is direct current
Regulations for the output signal B.
Operator’s Panel
(1) Direct current output signal B
Connection Unit The direct current output signal B is used for driving relays and light
emitting diodes for indication on the machine. A transistor is used as
a driver.
(a) Ratings of the output transistor
(i) Maximum load current when output is ON: 200 mA (including
momentary load)
(ii)Saturation voltage when output is ON: 1.6 V (maximum)/1.0 V
(normal) (when load current is 200 mA)
The maximum load current is limited to 1.3 A per common wire
(Note).
NOTE
Although a maximum load current of 200 mA is permitted
when the output is ON, the load current allowed to flow
through a common wire is limited to 1.3 A. Therefore, the
load current of the output transistor must satisfy the
following condition:
(N × I)/Mt 1.3 A
Where N = Number of DO points that can be turned on
simultaneously
I = Load current that flows when output is ON
M =Number of common wires (one or two)
Example:When there are 64 DO points that can be turned on
simultaneously and two common wires are used, the rated load
current is 40 mA, calculated as shown below:
(64 × I) / 2t 1.3 A
It 40 mA
(iii)Withstand voltage when the output is off: 24 V + 20% or less
including an instantaneous value
(iv) Leakage current when the output is off: 100 mA or less
177
(b) Output circuit
ÂÂÂ Machine
ÂÂÂ
+
CNC
Relay
Regulated power
supply on the
machine
-
Transistor output circuit
(c) When an inductive load such as a relay is connected to the

machine, mount a spark killer as near the load as possible (20
cm or less). When a capacitive load is connected to the machine,
insert a serial resistor for limiting the current so that the rated
current and voltage are ensured even for an instantaneous value.
(d) When the lamp is turned OFF, its resistance becomes extremely
low. So, when the lamp is turned on directly by transistor
output, surge current may flow and damage the transistor. For
this reason, add a protective circuit as shown below.
Lamp +
CNC
Regulated
Protective resistor power
supply
–
178
6.5.3
Connector Layout for
Operator’s Panel
Connection Unit
Address
Note) DI80 to DIB7 can be used only for the

A16B–2200–0660.
NOTE
Address No. n can be decided by machine tool builders.
179
Address
Note) DO40 to DO77 can be used only for the

A16B–2200–0660.
NOTE
Address No. n can be decided by machine tool builders.
180
6.5.4
Details of the
Connection between
the Operator’s Panel
Connection Unit and
the Machine
Operator’s panel connection unit
Connector terminal number

Address number
Bit number

signal A
NOTE
The machine tool builder can determine address number p.
181

Address number
Bit number

signal A
NOTE
182

Address number
Bit number

signal A
NOTE
183

Address number
Bit number

signal A
NOTE
184
Connector terminal number Example of connection
Bit number
(*)
Address number

signal A
+24 V
regulated
power
supply
NOTE
The machine tool builder can determine address number q.
The common voltages for DO57 to DO00 are connected in the operator’s panel connection unit
(COM3).
+5 V output for supplying the power to the light emitting diode on the operator’s panel. The
output voltage is +5 VDC and the current is 300 mA. The power capacity is not enough to drive
the lamp. A separate regulated power supply is necessary for the lamp. The load capacity of
the output driver refer to 6.5.2.
185
Bit number
Address number

signal A
+24 V
regulated
power
supply
NOTE
The common voltages for DO57 to DO00 are connected in
the operator’s panel connection unit (COM3).
186
Bit number
Address number

signal A
+24 V
regulated
power
supply
NOTE
The common voltages for DO67 to DO70 are connected in
the operator’s panel connection unit (COM4).
187
6.5.5
External View of
Operator’s Panel
Connection Unit
Approx.
Fig. 6.5.5 External view of operator’s panel connection unit
The following LEDs and fuses are mounted on this printed circuit board.
[LEDs]
DB1 (GREEN PILOT): Lights when this PCB is ON.
DB2 (RED ALARM) : Lights when an error occurs on this PCB or
CNC.
[Fuses]
FU1 (3.2 A): For external 24 V input
FU2 (5.0 A): For +5 V power supply used on this PCB
Ordering specification A02B–0163–K111 (FU1/FU2 2–fuse set)
188
6.6 The source output operator’s panel connection unit (A16B–2202–0730,

or –0731) is connected to Series 15–B control units by the FANUC I/O
CONNECTION OF Link, and functions as the interface with the machine tool operator’s
SOURCE OUTPUT panel.
OPERATOR’S PANEL Output from this connection unit is source–type. Input is sink–type
(24 V common). However, some connection units have DI that can be
CONNECTION UNIT
switched to source–type input (0 V common).
Two connection units are available according to the number of I/Os.
Specification Input Output
A16B–2202–0730 96 64
A16B–2202–0731 64 32
Source output operator’s panel connection unit

A16B–2202–0730,0731
Control unit series 15–B
JD1A JD1B JDIA To next device
or
I/O unit If there is are no devices beyond this con-
nection unit, JD1A may be left open.
DC24 V CP61 CM51
Japan FCI 3–pole Connector (brown) CM52

Housing: SMS3PNS–5 Machine
operator’s
panel
CMB3
1 +24 V
2 GND
CMB4
3
Power supply input specification

Voltage: 24 VDC" 10%
Capacity: 500) 7.3 n (mA)
n: number of inputs ON simultaneously
Grounding of the operator’s panel connection unit
Ground mounting
plate
189
6.6.1 The input signal to the source output operator’s panel connection unit is
Source Output input over a non–insulated interface, and is called “DC input signal A.”
Operator’s Panel (1) DC input signal A
DC input signal A is sent to the NC from the machine tool by
Connection Unit Input
pushbuttons, limit switches, relay contacts and proximity switches.
Signal Standard Most receivers are sink types. However, some inputs can be switched
to source type. (Use of sink–type receivers is required in safety
standards.)
(a) Satisfy the machine–side contact conditions:
Contact capacitance: 30 VDC, 16 mA min.
Leak current between contacts in open circuit:
1 mA min. (voltage 26.4 V)
Voltage drop between contacts in closed circuit:
2 V max. (including cable voltage drop)
(b) Input receiver circuit
Sink–type connection:
safety standard compliant Receiver
(24 V common) output
Input signal Filter and level signal
conversion circuit
R
+24 V
+24 V
Fig. 6.6.1 (a) Sink–type receiver circuit
190
(c) Circuit of common switchable input receiver
Sink–type connection: safety standard Receiver

compliant (24 V common) output
conversion circuit
Contact
DICMN R
+24 V
+24 V
0V
Source–type connection Receiver

(0 V common) output
conversion circuit
Contact
DICMN R
+24 V
+24 V
0V
Fig. 6.6.1 (b) Common switchable receiver circuit
Figure 6.6.1 (c) below shows the signal timing standard.
(Signal) (Signal)
Logic “1”
DC input signal open (18 V or more)
Closed Logic “0”

(6 V or less)
Chattering of 5 ms or
less is ignored.
Receiver output
signal
5 to 22ms 5 to 22ms
Fig. 6.6.1 (c) Width and delay time of input signal
DC input signals are logic “1” when High, and logic “0” when Low.
191
Sink–type input signals are logic “0” when the contact is open, and logic
“1” when closed.
Source–type input signals are logic “1” when the contact is open, and
logic “0” when closed.
NOTE
If the output signal line falls to ground when the input signal
is source–type (0 V common), the state is the same when
the contact is closed. For this reason, source–type input
signals are not recommended for ensuring safety.
By CE–marking compliancy, sink–type (+24 V common)
input signals are required.
6.6.2 The output signal of the source output operator’s panel connection unit
is for driving lamps and LEDs on the machine tool operator’s panel. A
Output Signal Standard
MOS FET is used as the driver.
for Source Output
Operator’s Panel (1) Direct current output signal
The DC output signal is used for driving relays and light emitting
Connection Unit
diodes for indication on the machine. A transistor is used as the driver.
(a) Output signal standard is as follows:
Maximum load current when output is ON:
200 mA (including momentary load)
Saturation voltage when output is ON: 1.0 V max.
Withstand voltage: 24 V + 20% (including momentary load)
Leaking current when the output is OFF: 100 mA
Use the following power supply as the external power supply of the
output signal:
Power voltage: +24 V" 10%
Power current: Sum of maximum load current including
momentary current per board + 100 mA
min.
Power ON timing: Same time as or before control unit
Power OFF timing: Same time as or after control unit
NOTE
Connect the power supply that meets these specifications
to power terminals DOCOM and 0 V for the output signals.
The maximum current that is allowed to pass to each
DOCOM terminal pin is 2.0 A, and care must be paid to
prevent the sum of the load current from exceeding the
current that is allowed to pass via the DOCOM terminal.
192
(b) Output signal driver

Eight signals are output from each of the output signal driver
elements used on this operator’s panel connection unit.
The current of each output signal is monitored in the driver
element. When overcurrent is detected, output of that signal is
turned OFF. Once signal output is turned OFF due to overcurrent,
signal output is restored to ON as turning signal output OFF
eliminates the overcurrent state. For this reason, output is
repeatedly switched ON and OFF when the output signal falls to
ground or when it is in an overcurrent state. This also happens when
a large surge current load is connected.
The driver element also has an overheat detection circuit. When the
overcurrent state is continuous due to outputs having fallen to
ground and the temperature inside the element rises, output of all
eight signals is turned OFF and this OFF state is held. Output is
restored for each individual signal by temporarily setting output
logically OFF after the temperature inside the element has dropped.
Signal output can also be restored by powering OFF the system.
When the overheat detection circuit is activated on this printed
circuit board, the red LEDs mounted next to the driver element
light so that you can confirm activation of the overheat detection
circuit. (See Note.) When the overheat detection circuit is
activated, the CNC is notified of an alarm as a system alarm. (You
can also disable notification to the CNC system of this alarm by
closing (shorting) the short bar of setting pin CP1 mounted on this
printed circuit board. When notification is disabled, this alarm is
not treated as a system alarm.)
Correspondence between red LED and DO output signal
Red LED Name DO Output Signal Remarks
DAL1 Y q+0.0 to Y q+0.7
DAL2 Y q+1.0 to Y q+1.7
DAL3 Y q+2.0 to Y q+2.7
DAL4 Y q+3.0 to Y q+3.7
DAL5 Y q+4.0 to Y q+4.7
DAL6 Y q+5.0 to Y q+5.7
DAL7 Y q+6.0 to Y q+6.7
DAL8 Y q+7.0 to Y q+7.7
NOTE
Lighting of the red LEDs and transfer alarm to CNC function
are supported on printed circuit board 03B onwards.
193
If the CNC diagnoses that output does not turn ON even though it is ON,
a probable cause is that overloading of that output or other output in the
same element is causing the eight outputs of that element to stay OFF. If
this is the case, power the system OFF, and remove the cause of the
overload.
Driver device internal block diagram
DOCOM
OHD
CONTROL
IN#0 LOGIC
OUT#0
OCD
CONTROL
IN#1 LOGIC
OUT#1
OCD
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
CONTROL
IN#7 LOGIC
OUT#7
OCD
OHD: Overheat detection circuit OCD: Overcurrent detection circuit

The power supply for operation of this driver device is DOCOM (24 VDC).
(c) Output signal precautions

The figure below shows the precautions when connecting output
signals. Parallel connection of output terminals shown like that
shown in this figure is prohibited.
DOCOM
+24 V 0 V
Relay
DV
DV
0V
194
NOTE
If the output signal falls to ground when the output signal is
sink–type (0 V common), the output signal stays ON. For
this reason, sink–type output signals are not recommended
for ensuring safety.
By CE–marking compliancy, source–type (+24 V common)
output signals are required.
6.6.3
ALARM LEDs on A16B–2202–0730
Source Output A16B–2202–0731
Operator’s Panel
CP1
Connection Unit ALARM
DAL7
DAL8 DAL2 DAL3 DAL5
DAL1 DAL4 DAL6
ALARM out: Normal state

ALARM lit: Alarm state (communications with CNC suspended)
The source output operator’s manual connection unit is provided with a

function for detecting and outputting an alarm for excessive current
flowing to the output driver device caused by DO falling to ground.
When the above alarm is detected, the CNC outputs a system alarm, and
the LED corresponding to the DO where the alarm occurred lights. See
the following table for details on which LED lights.
You can also disable output of the output driver alarm as a CNC system
alarm by the on–board setting pin “CP1”.
If falling to ground of the DO causes excessive current to flow to the
output driver device.
195
DAL1 out: Normal state

lit: Error occurred on DO outputs Yq+0.0 to Yq+0.7
System alarms generated by the above alarms are as follows.

For details, refer to “Appendix C. 3 (3) –(18) SLC ERROR of the FANUC
Series 15/150–MODEL B Maintenance Manual (B–62075).”
“SLC–ERROR aa(bb)” Example “SLC ERROR 03(41)”
(aa: XXXXXX11
Binary bits 0 and 1 are “1”. Other bits are not fixed.)
(bb: X1XXXXX1
Binary bit 6 is “1”. Bits other than bit 0 to 4, and 6 are not fixed.)
The value obtained by subtracting “1” from the value indicated by bits 0
to 4 is the I/O group number where the error occurred.
The above example shows I/O alarms that have occurred in group O.
Setting pin “CP1” settings are as follows:
Open: CNC is not notified of alarm.
Short: CNC is notified of alarm.
196
6.6.4 (a) Connector pin assignment

Connector Pin
Assignment Addresses
of Source Output
Operator’s Panel
Connection Unit
CM51 CM52
1 DI00 33 DICMN1 1 DI60 33 0V
2 DI03 34 DI02 2 DI63 34 DI62
19 DI01 19 DI61
3 DI06 35 DI05 3 DI66 35 DI65
20 DI04 20 DI64
4 DI11 36 DI10 4 DI71 36 DI70
21 DI07 21 DI67
5 DI14 37 DI13 5 DI74 37 DI73
22 DI12 22 DI72
6 DI17 38 DI16 6 DI77 38 DI76
23 DI15 23 DI75
7 DI22 39 DI21 7 DI82 39 DI81
24 DI20 24 DI80
8 DI25 40 DI24 8 DI85 40 DI84
25 DI23 25 DI83
9 DI27 41 DI26 9 DI87 41 DI86
26 DI30 26 DI90
10 DI32 42 DI31 10 DI92 42 DI91
27 DI33 27 DI93
11 DI35 43 DI34 11 DI95 43 DI94
28 DI36 28 DI96
12 DI40 44 DI37 12 DIA0 44 DI97
29 DI41 29 DIA1
13 DI43 45 DI42 13 DIA3 45 DIA2
30 DI44 30 DIA4
14 DI46 46 DI45 14 DIA6 46 DIA5
31 DI47 31 DIA7
15 DI51 47 DI50 15 DIB1 47 DIB0
32 DI52 32 DIB2
16 DI54 48 DI53 16 DIB4 48 DIB3
17 DI56 49 DI55 17 DIB6 49 DIB5
18 +24 V 50 DI57 18 +24 V 50 DIB7
CMB3
1 DO00 33 0V
2 DO03 34 DO02
19 DO01 CMB4
3 DO06 35 DO05
20 DO04
4 DO11 36 DO10 1 DO61 14 DO60
21 DO07 8 DO62
5 DO14 37 DO13 2 DO64 15 DO63
22 DO12 9 DO65
6 DO17 38 DO16 3 DO67 16 DO66
23 DO15 10 DO70
7 DO22 39 DO21 4 DO72 17 DO71
24 DO20 11 DO73
8 DO25 40 DO24 5 DO75 18 DO74
25 DO23 12 DO76
9 DO27 41 DO26 6 DO56 19 DO77
26 DO30 13 DO57
10 DO32 42 DO31 7 0V 20 DOCOM
27 DO33
11 DO35 43 DO34
28 DO36
12 DO40 44 DO37
29 DO41
13 DO43 45 DO42
30 DO44
14 DO46 46 DO45
31 DO47
15 DO51 47 DO50
32 DO52
16 DO54 48 DO53
17 DOCOM 49 DO55
18 DICMN2 50 DOCOM
NOTE
Connector CNB4 is not mounted on this PCB when operator’s panel connection unit (DI/DO
64/32) is selected.
197
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–62073E/04
7 CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
208
B–62073E/04 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
7.1
CRT/MDI UNIT
INTERFACE
7.1.1 (1) Standard

Outline
CRT/MDI, PDP/MDI or LCD/MDI
ON/OFF BUTTON
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
CP4 See 5.2
ON
ON1 ON BUTTON
COM
Short–circuit ON2
OFF
OFF1 OFF BUTTON
OFF2
CRT, PDP, LCD UNIT
See 7.1.2 to 7.1.4 CN2 PDP POWER

CP2, CP3 or CP5
CP11 CRT POWER
CP5 LCD POWER
MAIN CPU BOARD
See 7.1.2 to 7.1.4
JA1 CN1, JA1 VIDEO SIGNAL
SOFT KEY CABLE
KEYBOARD PCB
JA2 CK2
See 7.1.9 and 7.1.10

CK1
OPTION–1 BOARD
(When the graphic
display function is used) JA1
Ground for protection.
209
(2) Standard (When LCD/MDI unit with built–in graphic function is

used)
LCD/MDI
ON/OFF BUTTON
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
CP4 See 5.2
ON
ON1 ON BUTTON
COM
Short–circuit ON2
OFF
OFF1 OFF BUTTON
OFF2
LCD WITH GRAPHIC FUNCTION
See 7.1.6
CP5 CP5 LCD POWER
MAIN CPU BOARD

See 7.1.6
JA1 JN1
JA2
SOFT KEY CABLE
See 7.1.9 KEYBOARD PCB
CNK2
CNK1
210
(3) MMC–II
CRT/MDI
POWER SUPPLY UNIT

See 5.2 ON
CP4 ON/OFF BUTTON
OFF
COM M4 TERMINAL
(14″ horizontal CRT/MDI)
TAB#10
(14″ vertical CRT/MDI)
CRT UNIT
See 7.1.2
CP2, CP3 or CP5 CN2 CRT POWER
MMC–II GRAPHIC BOARD

See 7.1.2
JA1 CN1 VIDEO INPUT
KEYBOARD PCB
MAIN CPU BOARD

See 7.1.9
JA2 CNK1
NOTE
The MMC–II board cannot be used on the 15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.
211
(4) MMC–III
CRT/MDI, PDP/MDI or LCD/MDI
ON/OFF BUTTON
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
CP4 See 5.2
ON
ON1 ON BUTTON
COM
Short– ON2
OFF circuit
OFF1 OFF BUTTON
OFF2
CRT, PDP, LCD BUTTON
See 7.1.2 and 7.1.3 CP11 CRT POWER

CP2, CP3 or CP5
CP5 LCD POWER
MMC–III CPU board

See 7.1.2 and 7.1.3
JA1A JA1 VIDEO INPUT
See 7.1.11
SOFT KEY CABLE
JA1B
KEYBOARD PCB
OPTION–1 BOARD
JA1 CK2
CK1
MAIN CPU BOARD
JA2
See 7.1.9
NOTE
The MMC–III board cannot be used on the 15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.
212
(5) MMC–IV
CRT/MDI, LCD/MDI
ON/OFF BUTTON
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
CP4 See 5.2
ON
ON1 ON BUTTON
COM
Short–circuit ON2
OFF
OFF1 OFF BUTTON
OFF2
CRT UNIT
See 7.1.5 CP11 CRT POWER

CP2, CP3 or CP5
CP5 LCD POWER
MMC–IV CPU BOARD

See 7.1.5
JA1A JA1 VIDEO INPUT
See 7.1.9
SOFT KEY CABLE
JA1B
KEYBOARD PCU
MAIN CPU BOARD
See 7.1.9
JA2 CK2
CK1
OPTION 1 BOARD
JA1
NOTE
The MMC–IV board cannot be used on the 15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.
213
7.1.2
9″ CRT or 9″ PDP
Display Interface
(CE Marking
Non–compliant)
CNC 9″ CRT/MDI or 9″ PDP/MDI
JA1,JA1A CN1
(PCR–EV20MDT) HIROSE (MR–20RM)
FI40A–20S (Connector)
1 VDR 11 FI–20–CV5 (Case) 1 VDR 14
8 0V
2 0V 12 VSYNC (Note 1) 2 HSYNC 15
9 0V
3 VDG 13 3 VSYNC 16
10 0V
4 0V 14 0V 4 VDG 17
HONDA 11 0V
5 VDB 15 5 VDB 18
MR–20FH (Connector) 12 0V
6 0V 16 0V 6 19
MR–20LFH (Case) 13
7 17 7 20
8 18 HSYNC
9 19
10 20 Japan FCI
SMS3PN–5 (housing)
RC16M–23T3 (contact)
or RC16M–SCT3 (contact)
CP2 1 200A 1 200A
(Note 2) CN2
or 2 200B 2 200B (SMS3RK–3TK2)
CP3 3 G 3 G
(In case of 9″ color or 9″
monochrome PDP)
GND
214
NOTE
1 SIGNAL CABLE WIRING
1 1
VDR VDR
2 8
0V 0V
3 4
VDG VDG
4 11
0V 0V
5 5
VDB VDB
6 12
0V 0V
18 2
HSYNC HSYNC
16 9
0V 0V
12 3
VSYNC VSYNC
14 10
0V 0V
Ground plate

A66L–0001–0371 . . . coaxial cable: Max. 50 m
NOTE
2 Use three 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) wires or thicker for the power
cable.
3 There is a set place for the adjustment in the back of the
PDP/MDI unit. Refer to 7.1.7 for the adjustment method.
215
7.1.3
9″ CRT or PDP Display
Interface (CE Marking
Compliant)
CNC 9″ CRT PDP/MDI unit
JA1 (main CPU, option 1 board) CN1

(PCR–EV20MDT) HIROSE (MR–20RM)
FI40A–20A (connector)
1 VDR 11 FI–20–CV5 (case) 1 VDR 14
8 0V
2 0V 12 VSYNC 2 HSYNC 15
(Note 1) 9 0V
3 VDG 13 3 VSYNC 16
10 0V
4 0V 14 0V 4 VDG 17
11 0V
5 VDB 15 HONDA 5 VDB 18
MR–20FH (connector) 12 0V
6 0V 16 0V 6 19
MR–20LFH (case) 13
7 17 7 20
8 18 HSYNC
Japan FCI
9 19 SMS6PN–5 (housing)
10 20 RC16M–23T3 (contact)
or RC16M–SCT3 (contact)
CP5 1 +24V 1
(Note 2) CN2
2 0V 2
(SMS6RN–4)
3 (In case of 9″ monochrome CRT) 3 0V
4 0V
5 +24V
6 +24V
AMP Japan 1–178128–3(housing)
1–175218–5 (contact)
Japan Crimped Terminal
VHR–2N (housing)
CP5 +24V SVH–21T1–1 (contact) +24V CN2
1 1
(Note 2)
2 0V 2 0V (B2P–VH)
3 (In case of 9″ monochrome PDP)

GND
216
NOTE
1 Signal cable wiring
1 1
VDR VDR
2 8
0V 0V
3 4
VDG VDG
4 11
0V 0V
5 5
VDB VDB
6 12
0V 0V
18 2
HSYNC HSYNC
16 9
0V 0V
12 3
VSYNC VSYNC
14 10
0V 0V
Ground plate

A66L–0001–0371 . . . coaxial cable (max. 50 m)
NOTE
2 Use two 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) wires or thicker for the power
cable.
217
7.1.4
14″ Analog CRT, 10.4″
LCD, 9.5″ LCD Display
Compliant when
MMC–IV is not Used)
14″ CRT/MDI unit

10.4″ LCD/MDI unit
CNC 9.5″ LCD/MDI unit
JA1 (option 1 board) HIROSE JA1

(PCR–EV20MDT) FI40A–20S (connector) (PCR–E20LMD)
FI–20–CV5 (case)
1 VDR 11 1 VDR 11
2 0V 12 VSYNC (Note 1) 2 0V 12 VSYNC
3 VDG 13 3 VDG 13
4 0V 14 0V 4 0V 14 0V
5 VDB 15 5 VDB 15
6 0V 16 0V 6 0V 16 0V
7 17 7 17
8 18 HSYNC 8 18 HSYNC
9 19 9 19
10 20 AMP Japan 10 20
1–178128–3(housing)
1–175218–5 (contact)
CP2 or CP3 1 200A 1 200A

(Note 2) CP11
(AMP) 2 200B 2 200B (AMP)
3 G In case of 14″ CRT 3 G
CP5 1 +24V 1 +24V CP5

(Note 3)
(AMP) 2 0V 2 0V (AMP)
In case of LCD
3 3
AMP Japan
1–1782888–3(housing)
1–175218–5 (contact)
GND
218
NOTE
1 1
VDR VDR
2 2
0V 0V
3 3
VDG VDG
4 4
0V 0V
5 5
VDB VDB
6 6
0V 0V
18 18
HSYNC HSYNC
16 16
0V 0V
12 12
VSYNC VSYNC
14 14
0V 0V
Ground plate

NOTE
2 Use three 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) wires or thicker for the power
cable.
cable.
219
7.1.5
14″ Analog CRT, 10.4″
LCD, 9.5″ LCD Display
Compliant when
MMC–IV is Used)
14″ CRT/MDI unit
10.4″ LCD/MDI unit
JA1A (MMC–IV board) HIROSE JA1

1 VDR 11 1 VDR 11
2 0V 12 VSYNC (Note 1) 2 0V 12 VSYNC
3 VDG 13 3 VDG 13
4 0V 14 0V 4 0V 14 0V
5 VDB 15 5 VDB 15
6 0V 16 0V 6 0V 16 0V
7 17 7 17
9 19 9 19
10 20 AMP Japan 10 20
1–178128–3(housing)
1–175218–5 (contact)
CP2 or CP3 1 200A 1 200A

(Note 2) CP11
(AMP) 2 200B 2 200B (AMP)
3 G In case of 14″ CRT 3 G
CP5 1 +24V 1 +24V CP5

(Note 3)
(AMP) 2 0V 2 0V (AMP)
In case of LCD
3 3
AMP Japan
2–178288–3(housing)
1–175218–5 (contact)
GND
220
NOTE
1 1
VDR VDR
2 2
0V 0V
3 3
VDG VDG
4 4
0V 0V
5 5
VDB VDB
6 6
0V 0V
18 18
HSYNC HSYNC
16 16
0V 0V
12 12
VSYNC VSYNC
14 14
0V 0V
Ground plate

NOTE
2 Use three 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) wires or thicker for the po
wer cable.
cable.
4 The MMC–IV board cannot be used on the
221
7.1.6
10.4″ LCD Display
Compliant with Built–in
Graphic Function)
JA1 (main CPU board) HIROSE JN1

1 RXD 11 1 TXD 11
2 0V 12 TXD (Note 1) 2 0V 12 RXD
3 13 3 13
4 0V 14 0V 4 0V 14 0V
5 *RXD 15 5 *TXD 15
6 0V 16 0V 6 0V 16 0V
7 17 7 17
8 18 *TXD 8 18 *RXD
9 19 9 19
10 20 10 20
CP5 1 +24V 1 +24V CP5

(Note 2)
(AMP) 2 0V 2 0V (AMP)
3 3
AMP Japan
2–178288–3(housing)
1–175218–5 (contact)
GND
222
NOTE
1 1
RXD TXD
2 2
0V 0V
4 4
0V 0V
5 5
*RXD *TXD
6 6
0V 0V
18 18
*TXD *RXD
16 16
0V 0V
12 12
TXD RXD
14 14
0V 0V
Ground plate

NOTE
cable.
223
7.1.7 (1) Overview

Adjusting the Flat A color liquid crystal display (LCD) and plasma display (PDP) require
Display settings for finely adjusting the video signal.
These settings are necessary because the signal slightly varies depending
on the NC unit or cables.
How to do the settings is described below.
Do the adjustment if the hardware of the display circuit on the NC, the
display unit, or a cable is replaced during installation or when a problem
occurs.
(2) Points to be adjusted
TM1 Power SW1 TM1

SW1
supply
Color liquid crystal Plasma display (rear side)

display (rear side)
(3) How to do the adjustments

(a) Adjusting any flickering
1 Color liquid crystal display: Setting pin TM1
2 Plasma display: Setting switch TM1
1) Change the setting to find a range in which there is no flickering.
2) If there are several settings without flickering, select the middle
one.
(Example) When there is no flickering in settings 2 to 6, select
setting 4.
(b) Setting the horizontal position
1 Color liquid crystal display: Setting switch SW1
2 Plasma display: Setting switch SW1
1) The horizontal position can be adjusted in units of dots.
2) Set the switch so that the entire screen is displayed. There is only
one such position. Normally, it is not necessary to change the
factory setting.
(4) Others
Do not change settings other than above such as volumes.
NOTE
The brightness of the LCD display drops in low ambient
temperatures. (The LCD screen is dark immediately after
the power is turned ON.) This is due to the characteristics
of the LCD, and is not a malfunction. The LCD screen
becomes brighter when the ambient temperature rises.
224
7.1.8
Interface between
MMC–IV Board and
Option 1 Board
(Video Signal)
MMC–IV board Option 1 board
JA1A HIROSE JA1

(PCR–EV20MDT) FI40A–20S (connector) (PCR–E20MDT)
1 VDR 11 1 VDR 11
2 0V 12 VSYNC 2 0V 12 VSYNC
3 VDG 13 3 VDG 13
4 0V 14 0V 4 0V 14 0V
5 VDB 15 5 VDB 15
6 0V 16 0V 6 0V 16 0V
7 17 7 17
9 19 9 19
10 20 10 20
Signal cable wiring
1 1
VDR VDR
2 2
0V 0V
3 3
VDG VDG
4 4
0V 0V
5 5
VDB VDB
6 6
0V 0V
18 18
HSYNC HSYNC
16 16
0V 0V
12 12
VSYNC VSYNC
14 14
0V 0V

A66L–0001–0371 . . . coaxial cable (max. 40 cm)
NOTE
The MMC–IV board cannot be used on the
225
7.1.9 The keyboard interface specification is common to all MDI units exccept
Keyboard Interface 9″ keyboard interface.
(Note 1)
CNC (LCD) CRT/MDI UNIT (MDI)
JA2 CNK1
(PCR–EV20MDT) (PCR–E20MD)
1 *KEY00 11 *KEY01 1 *KEY00 11 *KEY01
2 *KEY02 12 *KEY03 2 *KEY02 12 *KEY03
3 *KEY04 13 *KEY05 3 *KEY04 13 *KEY05
4 *KEY06 14 *KEY07 4 *KEY06 14 *KEY07
5 *COM00 15 *COM01 5 *COM00 15 *COM01
6 *COM02 16 *COM03 6 *COM02 16 *COM03
7 *COM04 17 *COM05 7 *COM04 17 *COM05
8 *COM06 18 *COM07 NOTE 8 18
*COM06 *COM07
9 *COM08 19 *COM09 1 The parenthesized mode’s
9 *COM08 19 *COM09
apply to the 10.4″ LCD/MDI
10 *COM10 20 *COM11 10 *COM10 20 *COM11
unit with the internal graphics
function.
Cable wiring
1 1
*KEY00 *KEY00
2 2
*KEY02 *KEY02
3 3
*KEY04 *KEY04
4 4
*KEY06 *KEY06
5 5
*COM00 *COM00
6 6
*COM02 *COM02
7 7
*COM04 *COM04
8 8
*COM06 *COM06
9 9
*COM08 *COM08
10 10
*COM10 *COM10
11 11
*KEY01 *KEY01
12 12
*KEY03 *KEY03
13 13
*KEY05 *KEY05
14 14
*KEY07 *KEY07
15 15
*COM01 *COM01
16 16
*COM03 *COM03
17 17
*COM05 *COM05
18 18
*COM07 *COM07
19 19
*COM09 *COM09
20 20
*COM11 *COM11
Shield
Ground plate

A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG × 10–pair)
Cable length: Up to 50 m
226
7.1.10
Small 9″ Keyboard
Interface
CNC CRT/MDI UNIT
JA2 CA9
(PCR–EV20MDT) (MR–20RFD)
1 *KEY00 11 *KEY01 1 *COM11 14 *COM04
8 *COM02
2 *KEY02 12 *KEY03 2 *COM00 15 *COM05
9 *COM03
3 *KEY04 13 *KEY05 3 *COM01 16 *COM06
10 *KEY07
4 *KEY06 14 *KEY07 4 *KEY06 17 *COM07
11 *KEY05
5 *COM00 15 *COM01 5 *KEY04 18 *COM08
12 *KEY03
6 *COM02 16 *COM03 6 *KEY02 19 *COM09
13 *KEY01
7 *COM04 17 *COM05 7 *KEY00 20 *COM10
8 *COM06 18 *COM07
9 *COM08 19 *COM09
10 *COM10 20 *COM11
Cable wiring
1 7
*KEY00 *KEY00
2 6
*KEY02 *KEY02
3 5
*KEY04 *KEY04
4 4
*KEY06 *KEY06
5 2
*COM00 *COM00
6 8
*COM02 *COM02
7 14
*COM04 *COM04
8 16
*COM06 *COM06
9 18
*COM08 *COM08
10 20
*COM10 *COM10
11 13
*KEY01 *KEY01
12 12
*KEY03 *KEY03
13 11
*KEY05 *KEY05
14 10
*KEY07 *KEY07
15 3
*COM01 *COM01
16 9
*COM03 *COM03
17 15
*COM05 *COM05
18 17
*COM07 *COM07
19 19
*COM09 *COM09
20 1
*COM11 *COM11
Shield
Ground plate

A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG × 10–pair)
Cable length: Up to 50 m
227
7.1.11
Interface between
MMC–III Board and
Option 1 Board
(Video Signal)
CNC MMC–III CPU board CNC option 1 board
JA1 JA1
(PCR–EV20MDT) (PCR–EV20MDT)
1 VDR 11 1 VDR 11
2 0V 12 VSYNC 2 0V 12 VSYNC
3 VDG 13 3 VDG 13
4 0V 14 0V 4 0V 14 0V
5 VDB 15 5 VDB 15
6 0V 16 0V 6 0V 16 0V
7 17 7 17
8 18 HSYNC 8 (DTC) 18 HSYNC
9 19 9 19
10 20 10 20
Signals with marked ( ) is not used.
Cable wiring
1 1
VDR VDR
2 2
0V 0V
3 3
VDG VDG
4 4
0V 0V
5 5
VDB VDB
6 6
0V 0V
18 18
HSYNC HSYNC
16 16
0V 0V
12 12
VSYNC VSYNC
14 14
0V 0V
Ground plate

A66L–0001–0371 . . . coaxial cable
NOTE
The MMC–III board cannot be used on the
228
7.2
I/O DEVICE
INTERFACE
7.2.1
RS–232–C Serial Port
RELAYING CONNECTOR
Cable wiring
Shield
Ground plate

A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG × 10–pair)
NOTE
For +24 V and SG, determine the wire thickness and the number of wires so that the conductor
resistance is 0.33 W or less.
229
7.2.2
PPR Connection
RELAYING CONNECTOR
SIGNAL LAYOUT
Relaying connector
Connector: DBM–25S (Japan Aviation
Electronic Inc., Ltd.)
Lock metal: D20418–J2 (Japan Aviation
Cable side connector
Connector: DBM–25P (Japan Aviation
Lock metal: DB–C2–J9 (Japan Aviation
Relayingcable Accessory for PPR
Input power supply
AC85 to 125 V
50/60 Hz " 3 Hz 0.2 KVA
NOTE
1 Prepare the relaying connector, the relaying cable and the plug receptacle at the machine tool
builder.
2 Prepare the power supply for PPR at the machine tool builder.
3 Recommended cable specification: A66L–0001–0041
4 When connecting the PPR, set the corresponding parameter to use reader puncher interface
(baud rate is 4800 baud).
230
7.2.3
Portable Tape Reader
Connection
RELAYING CONNECTOR
SIGNAL LAYOUT
Relaying connector
Portable tape
reader
Accessory for
Relayingcable portable tape reader
Input power supply Cable side plug

WF7013 (Matsushita Denko)
AC200 to 240 V (+10%, –15%)

50/60 Hz " 1 Hz 110 VA (Without reel)
130 VA (With reel) Plug receptable
WF3012E (Matsushita Denko)
NOTE
1 Prepare the relaying connector, the relaying cable and the plug receptacle at the machine tool
builder.
2 Prepare the power supply for PPR at the machine tool builder.
4 When connecting the portable tape reader, set the corresponding parameter to use reader
puncher interface (baud rate is 4800 baud).
231
7.2.4
FANUC Cassette
Connection

Relaying
cable
Accessory for cassette
Relaying connector
RELAYING CONNECTOR
SIGNAL LAYOUT
NOTE
1 Machine tool builder shall furnish relay connector and relay cable.
2 Use a totally shielded cable for the signal cable.
Recommended cable specification: A66L–0001–0041
3 Open all terminals other than illustrated.
4 Set a parameter to be able to use reader puncher interface when connecting FANUC cassette.
The standard baud rate is 4800 baud.
5 Do not use a FANUC Cassette Adapter (an external disk drive) and FANUC Handy File (an I/O
unit) at the same time. If they are connected to separate connectors, two of connectors JD5A,
JD5B, and JD5J, the power capacity may exceed that of +24 V. (When the power capacity
exceeds that of +24 V, the operation may become abnormal or the fuse for +24 V may blow.)
232
7.2.5
Connection with the
FANUC Handy File

Relaying
cable
Accessory for cassette
Relaying connector
RELAYING CONNECTOR
SIGNAL LAYOUT
NOTE
1 The machine tool builder must provide the relay connector and relay cable.
2 Use a totally shielded cable for the signal cable.
Ordering code of recommended cable: A66L–0001–0041
3 Open all terminals other than those illustrated.
4 Set the parameter enabling the reader/punch interface to be used when connecting a FANUC
Handy File. The standard baud rate is 4800 bauds.
5 Do not use a FANUC Cassette Adapter FANUC Handy File at the same time. If they are
connected to separate connectors, two of connectors JD5A, JD5B, and JD5J, the power
capacity may exceed that of +24 V. (When the power capacity exceeds that of +24 V, the
operation may become abnormal or the fuse for +24 V may blow.)
233
7.2.6
Connection of Tape
Reader Without Reels
Tape reader
DB–25S–T (Japan Aviation
Electronic Inc., Ltd.
Connector: DB–25P
Locking: D110278
(Japan Aviation
M3 screw terminal
NIHON AMP
1–178128–3 (housing)
1–175218–5 (contact)
Connect signal cables as shown below.
Control unit Tape reader
Use cable lamp
NOTE
1 Note that cables with the same names on the control unit and the tape reader cannot be
connected.
3 When CP2 and CP3 for the power supply are used for another device or unit, use the 200 VAC
voltage which is synchronized with the power on/off of the CNC power supply as the power
supply for the tape reader.
234
7.2.7
Connection of Tape
Reader with Reels
Tape reader
BurndyJapan
SMS3PK–5
NIHON AMP
1–178128–3
Connect signal cables as shown below.
Control unit Tape reader
Use cable lamp
NOTE
1 Note that cables with the same names on the control unit and the tape reader cannot be
connected.
3 When CP2 and CP3 for the power supply are used for another device or unit, use the 200 VAC
voltage which is synchronized with the power on/off of the CNC power supply as the power
supply for the tape reader.
235
7.2.8
RS–422 Serial Port
CNC subboard Host computer (example)
+24 V is not used.
(1) Conceptual diagram for signal connection

The following is a conceptual diagram showing the connection of the
signals between the CNC and host.
Actually, each signal other than FG and SG requires two lines because
the signals are transmitted in differential signal transmission in the
RS–422 standard.
CNC Host
Output
Input
236
(2) Example of actual connection of RS–422 cables
(Note 2)
Shield
Ground plate
NOTE
1 Use twisted–pair cables.
2 Note that the pin position for the *DM signal is irregular on the CNC side (to prevent erroneous
connection).
237
7.3
MANUAL PULSE
GENERATOR
INTERFACE
MPG
MPG UNIT #1
(M3 screw terminal)
MPG UNIT #2
(M3 screw terminal)
MPG UNIT #3
(M3 screw terminal)
CABLE WIRING
Shield
Ground plate

A66L–0001–0286 (#20AWG × 6 + #24AWG × 3–pair)
FOR Lv 20 m
238
(1) Cable connection for the manual pulse generator

The power supply to the manual pulse generator is 5 VDC, same as for
the pulse coder. It is therefore necessary to prevent cable resistance
from causing the supply voltage to drop more than 0.2 V (total for both
the 0 V and 5 V lines).
This is written as:
0.2 u+ 0.1 R 2L 0.1: 0.1 A power supply current of the
m manual pulse generator
This can be converted to the R: Resistance per unit length of the
following equation: wire (W/m)
m: Number of wires connected in
L t+ m each 0 V and 5 V line
R
L: Wire length (m)
When A66L–0001–0286 cable is used:
This cable, developed for the FS15–B/16/18 pulse coder interface,
consists of three pairs of signal wires and six power line wires
(20/0.18, 0.0394 W/m). When three wires of this cable are used for 0
V and another three for 5 V, the allowable cable length is calculated
as follows:
L t+ 3 + 76.75 [m]
0.0394
This means that a power supply with a cable length of 50 m is still
within specifications.
239
7.4
REMOTE BUFFER
INTERFACE
(RS–232–C)
CNC OPTION–1 Board Host computer (example)
Conceptional diagram of signal connection
CNC side Host side

Output
Input
240
Example of cabling
Shield
Ground plate
Connect CS to RS if CS is not used. However, when protocol A or

expanded protocol A is used, connect as shown above because CS is used
for busy control. Connect DR to ER when DR is not used. Be sure to
connect CD to ER.
241
7.5
REMOTE BUFFER
INTERFACE (RS–422)
CNC OPTION–1 Board Host computer (example)
(+24 V) is not used.
(1) Conceptional diagram of signal connection

The figure below shows a signal connection between CNC and a host
computer. Since signals other than FG and SG perform differential
signal transmission, two wires of signal lines are used for those
signals.
CNC side Host side

Output
Input
242
(2) Actual example of RS–422 signal wiring
(Note 2)
Shield
Ground plate
NOTE
1 Be sure to use twisted pair cable.
2 Note that the pin position of the *DM signal on the CNC side is positioned irregularly relative
to the other signals. This is to reduce the risk of damage to the circuit when this connector is
erroneously connected to the connector on the other side.
243
7.6 Connection for high–speed skip signals is as follows:

HIGH–SPEED DI
SIGNAL INTERFACE
244
Cable connection
Shield
Ground plate
Shield
Ground plate
Description
High–speed skip signals (HSKP1 to HSKP4) or

high–speed measured position–reached signals
(HEA1 to HEA3)
15M
15T HDI0 = HSKP1 or HEA1
HDI1 = HSKP2 or HEA2
HDI2 = HSKP3 or HEA3
HDI3 = HSKP4
High–speed skip signals (HSKP1 to HSKP3) or

high–speed measured position–reached signals
(HEA1 to HEA3)
HDI0 = HSKP1 or HEA1 on tool post 1
151T HDI1 = HSKP2 or HEA2 on tool post 1
NOTE
Unused pins of the connectors must be left open.
245
High–speed DI Signal Receiver Input Signal Standard

Circuit configuration
Â
ÂÂ Â
Driver NC Receiver
ÂÂÂÂ Â
VH/VL
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
Iih/Iil
ÂÂ
ÂÂ Shield
Absolute maximum rating

Input voltage range Vin: –3.6 V to +13.6 V
Input characteristics
Item Symbol Standard Unit Description
High–level input voltage VH 3.6 to 11.6 V
Low–level input voltage VL 0 to 1.0 V
0.5 max. mA Vin=5 V

High level input current
High–level Iih
9.3 max. mA Vin=10 V
Low–level input current Iil –8.0 max. mA Vin=0 V
NOTE
1 Symbols lih and lil shows the signal flow direction, + signals
flow into the receiver, and – signals flow out of the receiver.
2 When the input voltage is low level, high–speed skip signals
are regarded as logic “1”, and when the input voltage is high
level, the signals are regarded as logic “0”.
246
7.7 Connect the reference position approach signal as shown below. This
signal is used when using the grid method (only for CNCs for multiaxis
CONNECTION OF machines).
REFERENCE For information regarding connections and sequences for reference
POSITION position return, refer to the BMI Interface Connection Manual. The
following text describes only the connection of the reference position
APPROACH SIGNAL
approach signal.
CNC (Additional cabinet)
Cable wiring
Shield
Ground plate
Signal name Description
NZ1 1st–axis reference position approach signal
NZ2 2nd–axis reference position approach signal

Axis CPU1
NZ3 3rd–axis reference position approach signal
NZ4 4th–axis reference position approach signal

Axis CPU2
247
7.8
DNC INTERFACE
7.8.1 a. Multi–point connection

DNC1 Interface CNC OPTION–1 board Tap
JD6A
(PCR–EV20MDT)
1 TRD1(+) 11 TRD2(+) 1 TRD2(+) 14
8
2 TRD1(–) 12 TRD2(–) 2 TRD2(–) 15
9
3 13 3 16
10 TRD1(+)
4 14 4 17
11 TRD1(–)
5 15 5 18
12
6 16 6 19
13
7 17 7 SG 20
8 SG 18
9 19
10 20
Cable connection
1 10
TRD1 (+) TRD1 (+)
2 11
TRD1 (–) TRD1 (–)
11 1
TRD2 (+) TRD2 (+)
12 2
TRD2 (–) TRD2 (–)
8 7
SG SG
PCR connector MR connector

(MR20 female)
248
b. 1–1 connection
CNC OPTION–1 board Tap
JD6A
(PCR–EV20MDT)
1 RD 11 SD 1 SD 14 CS
8 TT
2 *RD 12 *SD 2 *SD 15 *CS
9 *TT
3 RT 13 TT 3 TR 16
10 RD
4 *RT 14 *TT 4 *TR 17
11 *RD
5 CS 15 RS 5 RS 18 RT
12 DM
6 *CS 16 *RS 6 *RS 19 *RT
13 *DM
7 DM 17 TR 7 SG 20
8 SG 18 *TR
9 *DM 19
10 20
Cable connection
11 1
SD SD
12 2
*SD *SD
1 10
RD RD
2 11
*RD *RD
13 8
TT TT
14 9
*TT *TT
3 18
RT RT
4 19
*RT *RT
15 5
RS RS
16 6
*RS *RS
5 14
CS CS
6 15
*CS *CS
7 12
DM DM
9 13
*DM *DM
17 3
TR TR
18 4
*TR *TR
8 7
SG SG
Twisted shielded cable

0.3 mm2 wire or thicker
HONDA Tsushin MR20 (female)
249
7.8.2
DNC2 Interface CNC OPTION–1 board Host computer (example)
(RS–232–C) JD5C
(PCR–EV20MDT) DBM–25S
1 RD 11 SD 1 FG
14
2 0V 12 0V 2 SD
15
3 DR 13 ER 3 RD
16
4 0V 14 0V 4 RS
17
5 CS 15 RS 5 CS
18
6 0V 16 0V 6 DR
19
7 CO 17 7 SG
20 ER
8 0V 18 8 CD
21
9 19 (+24V) 9
22
10 (+24V) 20 10
23
11
24
12
25
13
Conceptual diagram of
signal connection
CNC Host
Output
SD SD
Input
RD RD
RS RS
CS CS
ER ER
DR DR
CD CD
SG SG
0V FG FG
FRAME
When CS is not used, short with RS.

When DR is not used, short with ER.
CD must be shorted with ER at all times.
NOTE
When an IBM PC–AT is used, RS becomes low in the
reception phase. When this happens, short CS on the host
with ER on the host.
250
7.8.3
DNC2 Interface CNC OPTION–1 board Host computer (example)
(RS422) JD6A 1 FG
(PCR–EV20MDT) 20
2
21
1 RD 11 SD 3
22 *SD
2 *RD 12 *SD 4 SD
23
3 RT 13 TT 5
24 *RD
4 *RT 14 *TT 6 RD
25 *RS
5 CS 15 RS 7 RS
26 *RT
6 *CS 16 *RS 8 RT
27 *CS
7 DM 17 TR 9 CS
28
8 0V 18 *TR 10
29 *DM
9 *DM 19 (+24V) 11 DM
30 *TR
10 (+24V) 20 12 TR
31
13
32
14
(+24 V) is not used. 33
15
34
16
35 *TT
17 TT
36
18
37
19 SG
Conceptual diagram of
signal connection
CNC Host
Output
Input SD SD
RD RD
RS RS
CS CS
TR TR
DM DM
TT TT
RT RT
SG SG
0V FG FG
FRAME
251
7.9 The following two configurations of the spindle interface are available in
Series 15–B.
SPINDLE INTERFACE
(1) α Series Serial spindle
Â
ÂÂ
P/C
Serial 1st spindle
ÂÂ
Â
SPDL–1 (JA7A) JA7B
JA7A
spindle
amplifier
Motor
Main CPU
board P/C
Serial 2nd spindle
JA7B spindle Motor
JA7A amplifier
(2) Analog spindle
Position coder return signal (A/B/Z phase)

SPDL–1 (JA7A)
P/C
1st spindle
Analog signal
Analog spindle Motor
A–OUT1 (JA8A) amplifier
SPDL–2 (JA7B) Position coder return signal (A/B/Z phase)
P/C
2nd spindle
A–OUT2 (JA8B) Analog signal
Analog spindle Motor
amplifier
The position coder return signal for the 1st spindle is connected to
connector JA7A used for connecting the serial spindle described in (1)
above.
NOTE
Only the 1st analog spindle can be connected for the Series
15–MB and 15–TB. The 1st and 2nd analog spindles can
be connected only for Series 15–TTB.
252
ÃÃÃÃÃÃ Spindle Motor Safety Measure
ÃÃÃÃÃÃ
WARNING To ensure a high degree of safety in the event of a malfunction, adopt a
safety measure such as that shown below capable of stopping spindle
rotation if a speed higher than the specified spindle speed is detected.
Ã
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃ Ã ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃ
Ã
CNC
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃ Ã ÃÃÃ
Spindle
ÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
P/C
Spindle speed
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃ
detection
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃ

ÃÃÃ
Spindle amplifier SP motor
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
Ã Ã
Actual spindle speed
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ Ã
signal
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ Ã
ÃÃÃÃÃ
Ã ÃÃÃÃ
Ã
AR0 to AR15
PMC
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃ
MCC
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃ
Greater
than
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃ
specified
value?
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
200 VAC input
Example of safety circuit when analog spindle I/F interface is used
The speed of rotation input to the CNC from the position coder is read by
the PMC. If this speed of rotation exceeds the preset spindle speed, the
MCC for the spindle amplifier is shut OFF by the PMC.
253
7.9.1 Connect to the spindle amplifier, using optical fiber cable equipped with
Serial Spindle Interface an optical I/O link adaptor.
(S Series Spindle)
I/O LINK ADAPTER

Spindle
amplifier
Up to 2 m Optical
fiber
cable
CABLE WIRING
Shield
Ground plate

A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG × 10–pair)
254
See section 6.2.2 for adapter and optical fiber cable specifications.
Pay attention to the following points when you are using the panel internal
wiring type without reinforced covering (A66L–6001–0008).
D Do not to bend optical fiber cable to less than a radius of 15 mm.
D Do not unnecessarily twist optical fiber cable.
D When securing optical fiber cable using nylon bands, do not allow the
outer covering of the cable to be deformed. (Do not tug on nylon bands.
Tugging on nylon bands applies unnecessary force on the optical fiber
cable.)
D When securing optical fiber cable using nylon bands, do not allow
bending force to be applied partially.
7.9.2
Serial Spindle Interface
(α Series)
CNC α series spindle amplifier module
JA7A (main CPU board) JA7B

(PCR–EV20MDT) (PCR–EV20MDT)
1 SIN 11 1 SIN 11 0V
ÃÃÃÃÃÃ
2 *SIN 12 0V 2 *SIN 12 0V
3 SOUT 13 3 SOUT 13 0V
4 *SOUT 14 0V 4 *SOUT 14 0V
5 15 5 15 0V
6 16 0V 6 16 0V
7 17 7 17
8 18 (+5V) 8 18 (+5V)
9 (+5V) 19 9 (+5V) 19
10 20 (+5V) 10 20 (+5V)
CNC α series spindle amplifier module
JA7A JA7B
3 1
SOUT SIN
4 2
*SOUT *SIN
1 3
SIN SOUT
2 4
*SIN *SOUT
12 12
0V 0V
14 14
0V 0V
16 16
0V 0V
Shield
Ground plate
255
NOTE
1 Recommended cable specification: A66L–0001–0248#10P (#28AWG x 10 pairs)
2 When this cable is wired closely to power cables or other cables, shielded leads must be
grounded to the grounding plate. This is unnecessary when the CNC is mounted close to the
spindle amplifier module.
3 When the CNC and spindle amplifier module are located in the same magnetics box or
magnetics box welded together, connection by electrical signal leads from this case is
necessary. When the CNC and spindle motor are mounted separately in two or more
magnetics boxes that are not welded together, they must be connected by optical fiber cable
using the optical I/O link adapter.
4 The +5 V terminal is for optical link transfer via the optical I/O link adapter. When connecting
by a metal cable such as this cable, leave the +5 V terminal unconnected. When the +5 V
terminal is connected by mistake, short both the +5 V terminals on the NC unit and the spindle
modular.
7.9.3
Analog Spindle
Interface
Ã Ã
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
Ã Ã Ã
Ã
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
SVC, ES
Ã
Spindle command voltage and common
Ã line
Ã
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ENB1, ENB2
Ã Spindle enable signal (Note 1)
Ã Ã Ã
Ã Ã Ã
CLKX0, CLKX1 Feed axis check signal (Note 2)
FSX0, FSX1
Ã
DX0, DX1
Ã Ã
Ã
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ Ã
" 15 V, ) 5 V, 0 V
CABLE WIRING
Shield
Ground plate
256
NOTE
1 ENB1 and 2 turn on when a spindle command voltage is effective. These signals are not used
when the FANUC Spindle Servo Unit is used.
2 Feed axis check signal is used when a feed axis is checked or service work is done. This signal
is not used for spindle control.
7.9.4
Pulse Coder Interface
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ Ã
Ã
Ã Ã Ã
Ã
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ Ã
Ã
Ã
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ Ã
Ã
SC, *SC Pulse coder C–phase signal
ÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
PA, *PA
Ã
ÃPulse coder A–phase signal
Ã Ã
ÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ Ã
Ã
PB, *PB Pulse coder B–phase signal
Ã Ã
SOUT, *SOUT Signal for serial spindle (Note 1)
ÃÃ Ã Ã
Ã Ã
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
POSITION CODER
Shield
Earthplate

A66L–0001–0286 (#20AWG×6+#24AWG×3) max length 20 m.
257
NOTE
1 Signals SPOUT and *SPOUT are for a serial spindle. These
signals are not used for an analog spindle.
2 When the line length is over 14 m, set the maximum
electrical resistance of 0 V and 5 V to 0.5 W.
The position coder, which generates square waveform voltage signals of

the number proportionate to the angle of rotation of the spindle, is used
for per–revolution feed and for thread cutting. The spindle and the
position coder are connected in the following four ways by parameter
setting (parameter 5610).
(1) One revolution of the position coder for one revolution of the spindle.
(2) One revolution of the position coder for two revolution of the spindle.
(3) One revolution of the position coder for four revolution of the spindle.
(4) One revolution of the position coder for eight revolution of the spindle.
Fig. 7.9.4 shows the timing chart of signals generated from the position
coder.
PA
1024 pulse/revolution
PB
1024 pulse/revolution
SC
1 pulse/revolution
Fig. 7.9.4 Waveform generated by position coder
NOTE
A differential driver is used for feedback from the position
coder.
*PA, *PB, and *SC are the inverted signals of PA, PB, and
SC respectively and vice sersa.
258
7.10
SERVO INTERFACE
7.10.1 The servo interface of the Series 15–B has these features.
Outline Digital control AC servo motor
Motor feedback : Serial pulse coder
1) 10,000 pulse/rev incremental pulse coder
2) 1,000,000 pulse/rev absolute pulse coder
Scale feedback : A/B/Z signal interface
SEPARATE TYPE
DISCHARGE UNIT
MAIN CPU BOARD T2 T4

OPTION–2 BOARD AC 200 V
T1 AC 100 V
JVn CN1
200 VAC INPUT
DIGITAL SERVO
AMPLIFIER
JFn
MS3106B22–14S
+6 V BATTERY UNIT
JA4A, JA4B FOR ABSOLUTE
PULSE CODER
JF2n
n=AXIS NUMBER LINEAR SCALE

(1, 2, .. 8)
For details, refer to FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR

DESCRIPTIONS (B–65002E)
259
7.10.2 (1) For the α series servo amplifier

Servo Amp Interface
JV1 to JV8
(PCR–EV20MDT)
n: Axis number
(1 to 8)
CABLE WIRING
Shield
Ground plate

A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG × 10–pair)
260
(2) For the S–series servo amplifier
JV1 to JV8
(PCR–EV20MDT)
n: Axis number (1 to 8)
CABLE WIRING
Shield
Ground plate

A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG × 10–pair)
261
(3) For the C–series servo amplifier
JV1 to JV8
(PCR–EV20MDT)
n: Axis number
(1 to 8)
CABLE WIRING
Shield
Ground plate

A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG × 10–pair)
262
7.10.3 (1) For the serial pulse coder A, B

Serial Pulse Coder
Interface
SERVO MOTOR
JF1 to JF8 PULSE CODER

(PCR–EV20MDT)
CABLE WIRING
Shield SHLD (shield)
Ground plate

A66L–0001–0286 (#20AWG × 6 + #24AWG × 3–pair)
263
(2) For the serial pulse coder C (model 0S or more)
SERVO MOTOR
(PCR–EV20MDT)
MS3106B20–29SW(straight)
MS3108B20–29SW (elbow)
CABLE WIRING

Ground plate

A66L–0001–0286 (#20AWG × 6 + #24AWG × 3–pair)
264
(3) For the model 4–0S to 0–0SP (common for incremental and absolute)
SERVO MOTOR
(PCR–EV20MDT)
Connector HDAB–15S
Connector cover HDAW–15–CV (2–0SP to 0–0SP)
Connector cover HDA–CTH (4–0S, 3–0S)
CABLE WIRING

Ground plate

A66L–0001–0286 (#20AWG × 6 + #24AWG × 3–pair)
265
(1) Cable connection for the incremental pulse coder

Series 15–B employ a serial pulse coder for which the power supply
is 5 VDC, same as used by the conventional pulse coder. It is necessary
to suppless the cable resistance used for the power supply to 0.5 V or
less (total for both the 0 V and 5 V lines).
This is written as:
0.5 u+ R 2L R: Resistance per unit length of the
m wire (W/m)
m: Number of wires connected in each
This can be converted to the
0 V and 5 V line
following equation:
L: Wire length (m)
L t+ m
4R
(a) When A66L–0001–0286 cable is used:
This cable, developed for the Series 15–B/16/18 pulse coder interface,
(20/0.18, 0.0394 W/m). When this cable is used, the maximum cable
length is calculated as follows:
L t+ 3 + 19 [m]
4 0.0394
This cable has a diameter of 8.5 mm and is suitable for use with the
Series 15–B/16/18 and 18 connector. However it cannot be extended
up to 50 m.
(b) When A66L–0001–0157 cable is used:
This cable, specified as cable C in the connection manual (B–61393)
for Series 0, consists of five pairs of signal wires and six power line
wires (50/0.18, 0.016 W/m).
When this cable is used, the maximum cable length is calculated as
follows:
L t+ 3 + 46.87 [m]
4 0.016
This cable can be extended up to 46 m from an electrical point of view.
However, because of its 11 mm diameter, it does not fit very securely
into f cable clamp for Series 15–B cable.
It is therefore necessary to use a larger size connector at a terminal
block or peel off the insulation sheath at the end of the cable to reduce
the diameter so that it fits into the connector.
Example 1)
For example, MR connector manufactured by Honda Communications
Pulse corder
Terminal
block
266
Example 2)
Pulse corder
Enlarged figure
Peel off the insulation sheath and cover with

a heat shrinkable tube
(2) Cable connection for the absolute pulse coder

Series 15–B employ the serial pulse coder, for which the power supply
5 VDC, same as for the conventional pulse coder. It is necessary to
suppless the cable resistance used for the power supply to 0.5 V or less
(total for both the 0 V and 5 V lines).
This is written as:
0.5 u+ R 2L R: Resistance per unit length of the

m wire (W/m)
m: Number of wires connected in each
This can be converted to the 0 V and 5 V line
following equation: L: Wire length (m)
L t+ m
4R
(a) When A66L–0001–0286 cable is used:
This cable, developed for the Series 15–B/16/18 pulse coder interface,
(20/0.18, 0.0394 W/m). When this cable is used, the maximum cable
length is calculated as follows:
L t+ 3 + 19 [m]
4 0.0394
This cable has a diameter of 8.5 mm and is suitable for use with the
connector for Series 16 and 18 but cannot be extended up to 50 m.
(b) When A66L–0001–0157 cable is used:
This cable, specified as cable C in the connection manual (B–61393)
for Series 0, consists of five pairs of signal wires and six power line
wires (50/0.18, 0.016 W/m).
When this cable is used, the maximum cable length is calculated as
follows:
L t+ 3 + 46.87 [m]
4 0.016
This cable can be extended up to 46 m from an electrical point of view.
However, because of its 11 mm diameter, it does not fit very securely into
the cable clamp for Series 15–B.
It is therefore necessary to use a larger size connector at a terminal block or
peel off the insulation sheath at the end of the cable to reduce the diameter
so that it fits into the connector.
267
Example 1)
For example, MR connector manufactured by Honda Communications
Pulse corder
Terminal
block
Example 2)
Pulse corder
Enlarged figure
Peel off the insulation sheath and cover with a heat shrinkable tube
268
7.10.4
Linear Scale Interface
(A/B/Z Signal Interface)
LINEAR SCALE
JF21 to JF28
(PCR–EV20MDT)
+6 V and REQ are for separate absolute pulse coders.
CABLE WIRING
Shield
Ground plate

A66L–0001–0286 (#20AWG × 6 + #24WG × 3–pair)
269
Input Signal Standard

The standard for the feedback signal from the linear scale is as follows.
(1) A, B phase signal input
The position of the linear scale is detected by inputting position
information by the A and B phase signals whose phases are mutually
displayed by 90°. The B phase signal ahead of the A phase signal is
interpreted as a movement of the linear scale in the plus direction,
while the A phase signal ahead of the B phase signal is interpreted as
a movement of the linear scale in the minus direction.
A phase signal
Move to + direction
B phase signal
A phase signal
Move to – direction
B phase signal
(2) Phase difference and minimum repeat cycle Tdy 0.15 msec (0.21 msec
when servo software 906X is used)
Ã
A
Ã
PCA/*PCA
0.5V
*PCA/PCA
Ã
B
Ã
PCB/*PCB
0.5V
*PCB/PCB
Td Td Td Td
ÃÃ Ã
Tp
(3) Z phase signal input

A signal width of 1/4 cycle or more of the A and B phase signals is
required for Z phase signal input (single rotation signal).
Z phase signal
ÃÃÃ Tw
Twy 1/4 cycle of A phase or B phase
270
7.10.5
Linear Scale Interface
(Serial Interface)
CNC Linear scale (serial interface)
JF21 to JF28
(PCR–EV20MDT)
ÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃ
1 SD 11
ÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃ
2 *SD 12 0V
3 13
4 14 0V
5 REQ 15
6 *REQ 16 0V
7 (+6V) 17
8 18 +5V +6 V is for separate absolute pulse coders.
9 +5V 19
10 20 +5V
CABLE WIRING
1
SD SD
2
*SD *SD
5
REQ REQ
6
*REQ *REQ
9
+5V +5V
18
+5V +5V
20
+5V +5V
12
0V 0V
14
0V 0V
16
0V 0V
Shield
Ground plate

A66L–0001–0286 (#20AWG × 6 + #24AWG × 3–pairs)
271
7.10.6
APC Battery Interface
Batterycase
CABLE WIRING
Batterycase

y 0.2 mm2 (7/0.18)
NOTE
The service life of the APC battery is about one year per
four–cell battery case when used for backup of six axes
(serial pulse coder A).
272
7.10.7 The hybrid control system requires an auxiliary position detecting device
Hybrid–control in addition to the position detector used in conventional servo systems.
This auxiliary position detecting device is called the separate detector.
Connections For hybrid control, the pulse detector can be used as the separate detector
(linear scale such as an optical scale or Magnescale). The separate
detector connectors (JF21 to JF28) of the CNC are the same as those of
the linear scale interface (see 7.10.4).
CNC
Linear scale
Position JVn
command AC
Hybride Digital servo
control servo motor
amp.
Build in
pulse
coder
JFn
JF2n
n: Axis number = 1, 2, 3 ...
273
7.11
GENERAL–PURPOSE CNC Analog voltage input range: –10 V to +10 V
Input current: " 0.5 mA max.
ANALOG VOLTAGE JA6
(PCR–EV20MDT)
INPUT INTERFACE AIN0 AIN1
1 11
2 0V 12 0V
ÃÃ
ÃÃ
3 AIN2 13 AIN3
4 0V 14 0V
5 15
6 (0V) 16 (0V)
7 17
8 18
9 19
10 20
NOTE
Signals enclosed in parentheses cannot be used.
Unused pins must be left open.
Connect the signal cables as follows:
Control unit
+5V
R R 1st analog spindle unit
Ã R
AIN0 1
0V 2
LM1
0M1
+5V
R 2nd analog spindle unit
R AIN1 11
Ã R 0V 12
+5V
R
ÃR R AIN2 3
0V 4
1st general–
purpose analog
input signal
+5V
R
Ã R
R AIN3 13
0V 14
2nd general–
purpose analog
input signal
Clamp the cables

with a cable clamp.
RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIAL:

A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG × 10–pair)
274
7.12
CONNECTION
BETWEEN THE
SERIES 15–B
(MMC–II) AND
PERIPHERAL UNITS
Control unit
MMC–II MAIN CPU Punch panel (RS–232C)
JD5A to JD5B: PCR20 CD6A to CD6B: DBM–25S
JD5A CD6A
to to
JD5B CD6B
JD6
(Note 3)
NOTE
1 The above diagram shows the connection with the punch panel (connector for an extension
cable). For connection with external devices, prepare cables for direct connection, if necessary.
2 The +24 V terminal in the above diagram is used exclusively for the FANUC I/O devices. Do
not use it for other purposes.
When a FANUC I/O device that utilizes +24 V is connected to Series 15–B, do not connect more
than one device at one time due to the limitation of the power supply.
3 For the MMC CPU (A02B–0120–J201), which requires two RS–232C channels and one
RS–422 channel, JD6 is used as an RS–422 port. Therefore, it cannot be used as an RS–232C
interface.
275
MMC–II MAIN CPU Punch panel

(RS–232–C)
JD5A to JD5B – 11 SD SD CD6A to CD6B – 02

JD5A to JD5B – 12 0V
Ã
JD5A to JD5B – 01 RD RD CD6A to CD6B – 03
Ã
Ã
JD5A to JD5B – 15 RS RS CD6A to CD6B – 04
Ã
Ã
JD5A to JD5B – 05 CS CS CD6A to CD6B – 05
Ã
Ã
JD5A to JD5B – 03 DR DR CD6A to CD6B – 06
Ã
JD5A to JD5B – 07 CD CD CD6A to CD6B – 08
Ã
JD5A to JD5B – 13 ER ER CD6A to CD6B – 20
Ã
JD5A to JD5B – 14 0V SG CD6A to CD6B – 07
ÃÃ
JD5A to JD5B – 10 +24V
ÃÃ Ã
Ã
Ã
ÃÃ Ã
ÃÃ Ã
JD5A to JD5B – 19 +24V +24V CD6A to CD6B – 25
FG CD6A to CD6B – 01
Ã
Ã
NOTE
1 The cable shall be shielded twisted–pair cable, 7/0.127 (0.09 mm2) or thicker. Connect the units
in accordance with the above diagram, and fasten the shield with a cable clamp.
Recommended cable: A66L–0001–0284#10P
276
7.13
CONNECTION WITH
AN EXTERNAL
DEVICE USING THE
RS–422 INTERFACE
FOR SERIES 15–B
(MMC–II)
Control unit
MMC–II MAIN CPU External device (RS–422)
JD6: PCR20
NOTE
1 In the above diagram, the interface for the external device is an example. The cable to be
actually used shall be designed according to the interface for external device.
2 Do not connect anything to the (+24 V) terminal.
3 For the MMC–II CPU (A02B–0120–J202), which requires three RS–232C channels, JD6 is
used as an RS–232C port. Therefore, it cannot be used as an RS–422 interface.
277
MMC–II MAIN CPU I/O (RS–422)
JD6 – 11 SD RD – 06
JD6 – 12 *SD *RD – 24
JD6 – 01 RD SD – 04
JD6 – 02 *RD *SD – 22
JD6 – 15 RS CS – 09
JD6 – 16 *RS *CS – 27
JD6 – 05 CS RS – 07
JD6 – 06 *CS *RS – 25
JD6 – 07 DR ER – 12
JD6 – 09 *DR *ER – 30
JD6 – 17 ER DR – 11
JD6 – 18 *ER *DR – 29
JD6 – 13 TT RT – 08
JD6 – 14 *TT *RT – 26
JD6 – 03 RT TT – 17
JD6 – 04 *RT *TT – 35
JD6 – 08 0V SG – 19
JD6 – 10 (+24V)
JD6 – 19 (+24V) FG – 01
Ã
NOTE
The cable shall be shielded twisted–pair cable, 7/0.127 (0.09 mm2) or thicker.
Connect the units in accordance with the above diagram, and fasten the shield with a cable
clamp.
278
7.14
CONNECTION WITH
A PRINTER USING
THE CENTRONICS
INTERFACE FOR
FANUC SERIES 15–B
(MMC–II)
Control unit
MMC–II MAIN CPU Printer (Centronics)
JD9: PCR20
NOTE
1 In the above diagram, the interface for the external device is an example. The cable to be
actually used shall be designed according to the interface for the applicable external device.
279
MMC–II MAIN CPU Printer (Centronics)
JD9 – 01 STD0 STD0 – 02

0V – 20
JD9 – 02 STD1 STD1 – 03
Ã 0V – 21
Ã
JD9 – 03 STD2 STD2 – 04
0V – 22
JD9 – 04 STD3 STD3 – 05
JD9 – 12 0V Ã 0V – 23
JD9 – 05 STD4 STD4 – 06

0V – 24
JD9 – 06 STD5
Ã STD5 – 07
Ã
0V – 25
Ã
JD9 – 07 STD6 STD6 – 08
0V – 26
JD9 – 08 STD7
Ã STD7 – 09
Ã
0V – 27
JD9 – 14 0V
JD9 – 09 PE PE – 12
0V – 30
Ã
JD9 – 11 *STB *STB – 01
0V –19
JD9 – 10 SLCT SLCT – 13
Ã
– 14
Ã Ã
JD9 – 13 *AFD *AFD – 16
0V
JD9 – 16 0V
JD9 – 15 *INIT *INIT – 31

0V – 28
JD9 – 20 BUSY BUSY – 11
Ã 0V – 29
Ã
JD9 – 17 *SLIN *SLIN – 36
JD9 – 19 *ERROR *ERROR – 32
JD9 – 18 0V Ã Ã 0V – 33
Ã
Ã
FG – 17
NOTE
The cable shall be shielded twisted–pair cable, 7/0.127 (0.09 mm2) or thicker. Connect the units
280
7.15
CONNECTION WITH
AN EXTENSION
ADAPTOR UNIT FOR
FANUC SERIES 15–B
(MMC–II)
Control unit Extension adapter unit

MAIN CPU (01P3C)
JD5C: PCR20 JD5: PCR20
(Note 1)
To keyboard
M4 screw terminal
NOTE
1 It is not necessary to prepare the cable, because it is attached to the keyboard.
281
(1) Connection for signal wire
MAIN CPU Extension adapter
Ã Ã
Ã Ã
JD5C – 11 SDK SDK JD5 – 11
Ã Ã
JD5C – 12 0V 0V JD5 – 12
Ã Ã
JD5C – 01 RDK RDK JD5 – 01
Ã Ã
JD5C – 02 0V 0V JD5 – 02
Ã Ã
JD5C – 05 CSK CSK JD5 – 05
Ã Ã
JD5C – 04 0V 0V JD5 – 04
Ã Ã
JD5C – 13 ERK ERK JD5 – 13
Ã Ã
JD5C – 14 0V 0V JD5 – 14
D5C – 10
Ã +24V +24V
Ã JD5 – 10
D5C – 19
Ã +24V +24V
Ã JD5 – 19
D5C – 06
Ã 0V 0V
Ã JD5 – 06
D5C – 08
Ã 0V 0V
Ã JD5 – 08
D5C – 16
Ã 0V 0V
Ã JD5 – 16
ÃÃ
NOTE
The cable shall be shielded twisted–pair cable, 7/0.127 (0.09 mm2) or thicker. Connect the units
Recommended cable: A66L–0001–0284#10P.
(2) Connection with the cable
Extension adapter
NOTE
The cable shall be 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) or thicker. Ground
the cable.
282
7.16
CONNECTION WITH
A HARD DISK UNIT
FOR FANUC SERIES
15–B (MMC–II)
Control unit Hard disk unit

MMC–II MAIN CPU (01P3C)
JD7: PCR50 JD7: PCR50
Power supply unit
NOTE
283
Hard disk unit CassetteStreamerunit
JD7B: PCR50 JD7A: PCR50
284
MAIN CPU Hard Disk Unit

(Hard disk unit) (Cassette streamer unit)
ÃÃ Ã
JD7 – 26 *DB0 *DB0 JD7 – 26
ÃÃ Ã
JD7 – 01 0V 0V JD7 – 01
ÃÃ Ã
JD7 – 27 *DB1 *DB1 JD7 – 27
JD7 – 02 0V 0V JD7 – 02
ÃÃ
JD7 – 28 *DB2 *DB2
Ã JD7 – 28
ÃÃ Ã
JD7 – 03 0V 0V JD7 – 03
ÃÃ Ã
JD7 – 29 *DB3 *DB3 JD7 – 29
JD7 – 04 0V 0V JD7 – 04
ÃÃ
JD7 – 30 *DB4 *DB4
Ã JD7 – 30
ÃÃ Ã
JD7 – 05 0V 0V JD7 – 05
ÃÃ Ã
JD7 – 31 *DB5 *DB5 JD7 – 31
JD7 – 06 0V 0V JD7 – 06
ÃÃ
JD7 – 32 *DB6 *DB6
Ã JD7 – 32
ÃÃ
JD7 – 07 0V
Ã
0V JD7 – 07
ÃÃ Ã
JD7 – 33 *DB7 *DB7 JD7 – 33
ÃÃ Ã
JD7 – 08 0V 0V JD7 – 08
JD7 – 34 *DBP *DBP JD7 – 34
ÃÃ
JD7 – 09 0V
Ã
0V JD7 – 09
ÃÃ Ã
JD7 – 38 *TERMPWR *TERMPWR JD7 – 38
ÃÃ Ã
JD7 – 39 0V 0V JD7 – 39
JD7 – 41 *ATN *ATN JD7 – 41
ÃÃ
JD7 – 16 0V
Ã
0V JD7 – 16
ÃÃ Ã
JD7 – 43 *BSY *BSY JD7 – 43
ÃÃ Ã
JD7 – 18 0V 0V JD7 – 18
JD7 – 44 *ACK *ACK JD7 – 44
ÃÃ
JD7 – 19 0V
Ã
0V JD7 – 19
ÃÃ
JD7 – 45 *RST *RST
Ã JD7 – 45
ÃÃ Ã
JD7 – 20 0V 0V JD7 – 20
ÃÃ Ã
JD7 – 46 *MSG *MSG JD7 – 46
JD7 – 21 0V 0V JD7 – 21
ÃÃ
JD7 – 47 *SEL *SEL
Ã JD7 – 47
ÃÃ Ã
JD7 – 22 0V 0V JD7 – 22
ÃÃ Ã
JD7 – 48 *C/D *C/D JD7 – 48
JD7 – 23 0V 0V JD7 – 23
ÃÃ
JD7 – 49
ÃÃ
JD7 – 24
*REQ
0V
*REQ
0VÃ
Ã
JD7 – 49
JD7 – 24
ÃÃ Ã
JD7 – 50 *I/O *I/O JD7 – 50
JD7 – 25 0V 0V JD7 – 25
ÃÃ
JD7 – 35 0V 0V
Ã JD7 – 35
ÃÃ
JD7 – 10 0V 0V
Ã JD7 – 10
ÃÃ Ã
JD7 – 36 0V 0V JD7 – 36
ÃÃ Ã
JD7 – 11 0V 0V JD7 – 11
JD7 – 37 0V 0V JD7 – 37
ÃÃ
JD7 – 12 0V 0V
Ã JD7 – 12
ÃÃ Ã
JD7 – 40 0V 0V JD7 – 40
ÃÃ Ã
JD7 – 15 0V 0V JD7 – 15
JD7 – 42 0V 0V JD7 – 42
ÃÃ
JD7 – 17 0V 0V
Ã JD7 – 17
ÃÃ ÃÃ Ã Ã
JD7 – 14 0V 0V JD7 – 14
JD7 – 13 JD7 – 13
285
NOTE
1 Use a shielded cable containing 25 pairs of AWG28 wires,
with a characteristic impedance of 100 to 130 ohms.
Recommended cable material: A66L–0001–0319#25P
2 For noise protection, thread the shielded cable through
ferrite cores as shown below and connect the shield to the
frame ground at both ends.
Connector Connector
Ferrite core Ferrite core
Cable
f f
FG FG
NOTE
3 Ensure that the total signal cable length (J11M + J66M)
does not exceed 6 m.
(2) Power connection
CP3 – 1 R R PW1 – 1
CP3 – 2 S S PW1 – 2
CP3 – 3 G G PW1 – 3
NOTE
Use a 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) wire or thicker for the power
cable.
286
7.17 Connection with portable 5.25″ and portable 3.5″ floppy disk unit
CONNECTION WITH
A FLOPPY DISK UNIT
FOR FANUC SERIES
15–B (MMC–II)
Control unit Portable floppy disk unit
MMC–II MAIN CPU (01P3C)

JD8: PCR50 JD8: PCR50
NOTE
287
Portable
Ã Ã
MAIN CPU
FDD Unit
Ã Ã
JD8 – 07 *MON *MON JD8 – 07
Ã Ã
JD8 – 08 0V 0V JD8 – 08
JD8 – 38 *MODE *MODE JD8 – 38
JD8 – 39
Ã
0V
Ã
0V JD8 – 39
Ã Ã
JD8 – 09 *DS0 *DS0 JD8 – 09
Ã Ã
JD8 – 10 0V 0V JD8 – 10
JD8 – 36 *DS1 *DS1 JD8 – 36
JD8 – 37
Ã
0V
Ã
0V JD8 – 37
Ã Ã
JD8 – 17 *DS2 *DS2 JD8 – 17
Ã Ã
JD8 – 18 0V 0V JD8 – 18
Ã Ã
JD8 – 40 *DS3 *DS3 JD8 – 40
JD8 – 41 0V 0V JD8 – 41
JD8 – 26
Ã
*SIDE *SIDE
Ã JD8 – 26
Ã Ã
JD8 – 27 0V 0V JD8 – 27
Ã Ã
JD8 – 34 *HDLD *HDLD JD8 – 34
JD8 – 35 0V 0V JD8 – 35
JD8 – 28
Ã
*TRK0 *TRK0
Ã JD8 – 28
Ã Ã
JD8 – 29 0V 0V JD8 – 29
Ã Ã
JD8 – 32 *INDEX *INDEX JD8 – 32
JD8 – 33 0V 0V JD8 – 33
JD8 – 15
JD8 – 16 Ã
*DIR
Ã
0V Ã
*DIR
Ã
0V
JD8 – 15
JD8 – 16
Ã Ã
JD8 – 30 *STEP *STEP JD8 – 30
JD8 – 31 0V 0V JD8 – 31
JD8 – 13
Ã
*WE *WE
Ã JD8 – 13
Ã Ã
JD8 – 14 0V 0V JD8 – 14
Ã Ã
JD8 – 03 *WPRT *WPRT JD8 – 03
Ã Ã
JD8 – 04 0V 0V JD8 – 04
JD8 – 05 *WDATA *WDATA JD8 – 05
JD8 – 06
Ã
0V
Ã
0V JD8 – 06
Ã Ã
JD8 – 11 *RDATA *RDATA JD8 – 11
Ã Ã
JD8 – 12 0V 0V JD8 – 12
JD8 – 01 *READY *READY JD8 – 01
JD8 – 02
JD8 – 19 Ã
0V
Ã
0V Ã
0V
Ã
0V
JD8 – 02
JD8 – 19
Ã Ã
JD8 – 20 0V 0V JD8 – 20
JD8 – 42 0V 0V JD8 – 42
JD8 – 43
Ã
0V
Ã
0V JD8 – 43
Ã Ã
JD8 – 44 0V 0V JD8 – 44
Ã Ã
JD8 – 45 0V 0V JD8 – 45
Ã Ã
JD8 – 46 0V 0V JD8 – 46
JD8 – 47 +5V +5V JD8 – 47
JD8 – 21
Ã
+5V
Ã
+5V JD8 – 21
Ã Ã
JD8 – 22 +5V +5V JD8 – 22
Ã Ã
JD8 – 23 +5V +5V JD8 – 23
JD8 – 48 +5V +5V JD8 – 48
Ã Ã
Ã Ã
Ã Ã Ã
288
NOTE
1 The cable for J12M shall be shielded twisted–pair cable, 7/0.127 (0.09 mm2) or thicker.
Connect the units in accordance with the diagram on the previous page, and fasten the shield
with a cable clamp.
2 The cable must not be more than 2 m long.
(2) Connection with the cable
Portable 5.25″
FDD Unit
R PW1 – 1
AC100V to S PW1 – 2
AC240V
G PW1 – 3
NOTE
The cable shall be 20/0.18 (0.5 mm2) or thicker.
289
7.18
RS–232–C SERIAL
PORT (MMC–III)
Host Computer (Example)

MMC–III CPU Board
JD5F to JD5H
(PCR–EV20MDT)
The signal marked with ( )

connect to FANUC I/O device side.
Signal connection
(1) When the terminals (CS, DR, CD) can not be used.
MMC–III CPU Board Host

SD SD
RD RD
ÃÃ Ã
RS RS
ÃÃ Ã
CS CS
ER ER
DR DR
CD CD
(SIGNAL GROUND) SG SG
(FRAME GROUND) FG FG
290
(2) When all signals can be used.
MMC–III CPU Board Modem

SD SD
RD RD
RS RS
CS CS
ER ER
DR DR
CD CD
(SIGNAL GROUND) SG SG
(FRAME GROUND) FG FG
NOTE
291
7.19
OUTER HARD DISK
INTERFACE
(MMC–III)
Minislot
Outer Hard Disk Interface Board

A02B–0161–K800 Cable for Data transmission or
Cable attached with external hard disk.
POKEDY 2.5 A87L–0001–0135
Refer to the wiring diagram on the next page.
NOTE
292
Cable Wiring
*D0 26 26 *D0
0V 1 1 0V
*D1 27 27 *D1
0V 2 2 0V
*D2 28 28 *D2
0V 3 3 0V
*D3 29 29 *D3
0V 4 4 0V
*D4 30 30 *D4
0V 5 5 0V
*D5 31 31 *D5
0V 6 6 0V
*D6 32 32 *D6
0V 7 7 0V
*D7 33 33 *D7
0V 8 8 0V
*DP 34 34 *DP
0V 9 9 0V
0V 35 35 0V
0V 10 10 0V
0V 36 36 0V
0V 11 11 0V
0V 40 40 0V
0V 15 15 0V
*ATN 41 41 *ATN
0V 16 16 0V
0V 42 42 0V
0V 17 17 0V
*BSY 43 43 *BSY
0V 18 18 0V
*ACK 44 44 *ACK
0V 19 19 0V
*RST 45 45 *RST
0V 20 20 0V
*MSG 46 46 *MSG
0V 21 21 0V
*SEL 47 47 *SEL
0V 22 22 0V
*CD 48 48 *CD
0V 23 23 0V
*REQ 49 49 *REQ
0V 24 24 0V
*IO 50 50 *IO
0V 25 25 0V
293
8. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL B–62073E/04
8 ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃ
NOTE
We recommend appropriate use of the emergency stop signal when
designing a safe machine tool.
The emergency stop signal is for stopping the machine tool in an
emergency, and is input to the CNC controller, servo amplifier and spindle
amplifier. Generally, B–contact pushbutton switches are used for the
emergency stop signal.
When the emergency stop signal (*ESP) contact is closed, the CNC
controller is set to an emergency stop canceled state, and the servo
amplifier and spindle motor can be controlled and operated.
When the emergency stop signal (*ESP) contact is open, the CNC
controller is reset to an emergency stop state, and the servo amplifier and
spindle motor are decelerated and stopped.
In the case of the servo motor, the drive power supply of the servo
amplifier is turned OFF to activate a dynamic brake and stop servo motor
operation. Since gravity causes the servo motor used for the gravity shaft
to continue operation, you must consider using a servo motor with a
brake.
In the case of the spindle motor, if the drive power supply of the spindle
amplifier is suddenly turned OFF turning spindle operation, inertia causes
the spindle to continue operation, which is more dangerous. The spindle
motor must be controlled in such a way that deceleration and stopping of
spindle motor operation is confirmed before its drive power supply is
turned OFF when the emergency stop signal (*ESP) contact has become
open.
The above have been taken into consideration in FANUC’s α series of
control amplifiers. On these control amplifiers, input the emergency stop
signal to the power supply module (PSM). Since the drive power supply
MCC control signal is output from the PSM, use this signal to control
ON/OFF switching of the drive power supply that is input to the power
supply module.
Detection of overtravel by the software limit function is included in the
basic specifications of this CNC controller, and limit switches for regular
detection of overtravel are not required. However, if a malfunction in the
servo feedback system causes the machine tool to move beyond the
software limits, provide stroke end limit switches so that the emergency
stop signal functions to stop the machine tool.
Figure 8 shows a example of how the emergency stop signal is connected
when this CNC controller and an α series control amplifier are used.
294
B–62073E/04 8. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL
Stroke end limit switch Emergency

stop button
Relay power
supply
Release switch
Spark killer
Relay
I/O unit connected to CNC
(module)
α series control amplifier (PSM)
External power
supply
Spark killer
Coil
Breaker 1 MCC AC reactor
Fig. 8
NOTE
When the amplifier is connected to a spindle motor made by
another manufacturer, a sequence for safely decelerating
and stopping the spindle motor when the emergency stop
signal contact becomes open during spindle motor
operation must be incorporated referring to the instruction
manual for the spindle motor.
295
APPENDIX
B–62073E/04 APPENDIX A. LIST OF EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS
A ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
LIST OF EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â Â Â
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Fig. 1 (a)
Â
External view of 3–slot control unit
Â Â
Fig. 1 (b)
Â
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Fig. 1 (c) External view of 6–slot control unit
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Fig. 1 (d)
Â
Â
Â Â
Fig. 2 (a)
Â Â
External view of horizontal type 9I CRT/MDI unit, (Small type,
Â
monochrome CRT)
External view of horizontal type 9I PDP/MDI unit, (Small type)
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Fig. 2 (b) External view of horizontal type 9″ small CRT/MDI unit (color CRT)
Â Â
Fig. 2 (c)
Â
External view of horizontal type 9″ CRT/MDI unit (standard,
Â Â Â
monochrome CRT)
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
External view of horizontal type 9″ PDP/MDI unit (standard)
Â Â Â
Fig. 2 (d) External dimensions of horizontal type 9″ CRT/MDI unit
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
(standard, monochrome CRT)
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Fig. 2 (e) External view of horizontal type 9″ CRT/MDI unit (standard, color)
Â Â
Fig. 2 (f)
Â
External view of horizontal type 9.5″ LCD/MDI unit [Weight; 4.5 kg]
Â Â Â
External view of horizontal type 10.4″ LCD/MDI unit [Weight; 4.5
kg]
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â Â Â
Fig. 2 (g) External view of horizontal type 9.5″ LCD/MDI unit [Weight; 5.0 kg]
External view of horizontal type 10.4″ LCD/MDI unit [Weight; 5.0
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
kg]
Â
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Fig. 2 (h)
Â
14″ CRT/MDI unit (horizontal)
Â Â Â
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Fig. 2 (i) 14″ CRT/MDI unit (vertical)
Â Â
Fig. 2 (j)
Â
9″ separate type CRT unit (monochrome CRT) 9″ separate type
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
PDP unit
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Fig. 2 (k) 9″ separate type CRT unit (color)
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Fig. 2 (l)
Â
Separate type MDI unit (standard)
Â Â Â
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Fig. 2 (m) External dimensions of separate type 10.4″ LCD unit
Â Â Â
Fig. 2 (n) External dimensions of separate type MDI unit (horizontal)
(for separate type LCD with built–in graphic function)
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Fig. 2 (p) External dimensions of separate type MDI unit (vertical)
Â Â Â
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Fig. 2 (q) External dimensions of separate type 9.5″ LCD unit
(monochrome STN)
Â Â Â
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Fig. 3 (a) External view of control transformer (A80L–0001–0176)
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Fig. 3 (b) Description of control transformer
331
A. LIST OF EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS APPENDIX B–62073E/04
Â Â Â
Â Â Â
Â Â Â
Fig. 4 (a) External view of position coder A or B
A86L–0026–0001#102: Max. 4000 rpm
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
A86L–0026–0001#002: Max. 6000rpm
Â Â
Fig. 4 (b)
Â
α External dimensions of position coder A860–0309–T302: Max.
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
10,000 rpm
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Fig. 5 (a)
Â
External view of manual pulse generator A860–0202–T001
Â Â Â
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Fig. 5 (b) External view of pendant type manual pulse generator
A860–0202–T004 to T015
Â Â
Fig. 6
Â
External view of FANUC PPR
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Fig. 7 (a) External view of punch panel (CE marking non–compliant)
Â
Â
Fig. 7 (b) External dimensions of punch panel (CE marking compliant)
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Fig. 7 (c)
Â
External dimensions of punch panel (CE marking compliant)
Â Â Â
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Fig. 8 External view of floppy cassette adapter
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Fig. 9 External view of FANUC Handy File
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Fig. 10
Â
External view of portable tape reader
Â Â
Fig. 11
Â
External view of tape reader without reels (serial interface)
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Fig. 12 External view of tape reader with reels
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Fig. 13 (a)
Â
External view of input unit (A14B–0076–B001)
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Fig. 13 (b)
Â
External view of input unit (Multiple axis) (A14B–0076–B401)
Â Â Â
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Fig. 13 (c) External dimensions of input unit (multi–axis machine)
(A14B–0076–B402)
Â Â Â
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Fig. 13 (d) External view of expanded power input unit (A14B–0076–B209)
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Fig. 14 (a) External view of PCR connector (soldering type)
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Fig. 14 (b)
Â
External view of FI40 connector
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Fig. 15 (a)
Â
External view of connector case (HONDA, PCR type)
Â Â Â
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Fig. 15 (b) External view of connector case (HIROSE FI–20–CV2 type)
Â
Â
Fig. 15 (c) External view of connector case (FUJITSU, FCN type)
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Fig. 15 (d)
Â
External view of connector case (HIROSE FI–20–CV type)
Â Â Â
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Fig. 16 (a) External view of AMP connector (1–178128–3)
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Fig. 16 (b) External view of AMP connector (2–178129–6)
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Fig. 16 (c)
Â
External view of AMP connector (2–178288–3)
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂ
Â Â
Fig. 16 (d)
Â Â
External view of AMP connector (1–178288–3)
Â
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Fig. 16 (e) External view of AMP connector (1–175196–2/–5, 175218–2/–5)
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Fig. 17 (a)
Â
External view of HONDA connector (case)
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Fig. 17 (b)
Â
External view of HONDA connector (female)
Â
Â Â
Â Â
Â
Fig. 17 (c) External view of HONDA connector (male)
332
B–62073E/04 APPENDIX A. LIST OF EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS
Â Â Â
Â Â Â
Â
Â
Fig. 17 (d) External view of HONDA connector (terminal layout)
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Fig. 18 (a) External view of connector made by FCI Japan (3 pins, black)
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Fig. 18 (b)
Â
External view of connector made by FCI Japan (3 pins, brown)
Â Â Â
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Fig. 18 (c) External view of connector made by FCI Japan (3 pins, white)
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Fig. 18 (d) External view of connector made by FCI Japan (6 pins, brown)
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Fig. 18 (e)
Â
External view of connector made by FCI Japan (6 pins, white)
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Fig. 19 (a)
Â
External view of reader puncher panel connector
Â Â Â
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Fig. 19 (b) External view of reader puncher connector metal fitting for lock
Â
Â
Fig. 20 External view of power receptacle for portable tape reader
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Fig. 21
Â
External view of battery case for absolute pulse coder
Â Â
Fig. 22
Â
External View of the Extension Adaptor Unit for Series 15–B
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
(MMC–II)
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Fig. 23
Â
External View of the Keyboard for Series 15–B (MMC–II)
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Fig. 24 External view of the hard disk unit for Series 15–B (MMC–II)
Â Â
Fig. 25
Â
External view of the Portable 5″ Floppy Disk Unit for Series 15–B
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
(MMC–II)
Â
Â Â
Fig. 26
Â Â
External view of the Portable 3.5″ Floppy Disk Unit for Series 15–B
Â
(MMC–II)
Â Â Â
Fig. 27 External view of the Portable Cassette Streamer Unit for Series
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
15–B (MMC–II) (A08B–0047–C071)
333
B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS APPENDIX B–62073E/04
B ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS
Weight: 2.3 kg
Fig. 1 (a) External view of 3–slot control unit
334
B–62073E/04 APPENDIX B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS
Weight: 2.5 kg
Fig. 1 (b) External view of 4–slot control unit
335
Weight: 3.8 kg
Fig. 1 (c) External view of 6–slot control unit
336
Weight: 5.0 kg
Fig. 1 (d) External view of 8–slot control unit
337
ÂÂÂÂÂ
Panel cut drawing
85 (PDP)
220 (Monochrome CRT)
CE marking compliant products are masked by an 8 mm wide paint band from the
outer periphery on the rear of the operator’s panel PCB. Weight: 4.0 kg
Fig. 2 (a) External view of horizontal type 9I CRT/MDI unit, (Small type, monochrome CRT)
External view of horizontal type 9I PDP/MDI unit, (Small type)
ÂÂÂÂÂ
Panel cut drawing
Unit support
(for reference)
An appropriate support for the

Weight: 8 kg CRT unit should be provided.
Fig. 2 (b) External view of horizontal type 9″ small CRT/MDI unit (color CRT)
338
ÂÂÂÂÂ
Panel cut drawing
85 (PDP)
Weight: 4.0 kg
outer periphery on the rear of the operator’s panel PCB.
Fig. 2 (c) External view of horizontal type 9″ CRT/MDI unit (standard, monochrome CRT)
External view of horizontal type 9″ PDP/MDI unit (standard)
339
ÂÂÂÂÂ
Panel cut drawing
Weight: 5 kg
Fig. 2 (d) External dimensions of horizontal type 9″ CRT/MDI unit (standard, monochrome CRT)
340
ÂÂÂÂÂ
Panel cut drawing
Unit support
(for reference)
Weight: 8 kg An appropriate support for the

CRT unit should be provided.
Fig. 2 (e) External view of horizontal type 9″ CRT/MDI unit (standard, color)
ÂÂÂÂÂ
Panel cut drawing
CE marking compliant products are masked by an 8 mm wide paint band from the outer periphery
on the rear of the operator’s panel PCB.
Fig. 2 (f) External view of horizontal type 9.5″ LCD/MDI unit [Weight; 4.5 kg]
341
ÂÂÂÂÂ
Panel cut drawing
Fig. 2 (g) External view of horizontal type 9.5″ LCD/MDI unit [Weight; 5.0 kg]
342
Fig. 2 (h) 14″ CRT/MDI unit (horizontal)
343
VIEW FROM REAR SIDE
8–f 4.8
Weight: 20 kg
ÂÂÂÂÂ
Panel cut drawing
Fig. 2 (i) 14″ CRT/MDI unit (vertical)
344
ÂÂÂÂÂ
Panel cut drawing
85 (PDP)
Weight: 3.5 kg
Fig. 2 (j) 9″ separate type CRT unit (monochrome CRT)

9″ separate type PDP unit
345
ÂÂÂÂÂ
Panel cut drawing
Weight: 8 kg
Fig. 2 (k) 9″ separate type CRT unit (color)
346
ÂÂÂÂÂ
Panel cut drawing
Weight: 0.5 kg
Fig. 2 (l) Separate type MDI unit (standard)
347
ÂÂÂÂÂ
Panel cut drawing
Weight: 2 kg
Fig. 2 (m) External dimensions of separate type 10.4″ LCD unit
348
ÂÂÂÂÂ
Panel cut drawing
Weight: 1 kg
Fig. 2 (n) External dimensions of separate type MDI unit (horizontal)

349
ÂÂÂÂÂ
Panel cut drawing
Weight: 1 kg
Fig. 2 (p) External dimensions of separate type MDI unit (vertical)

350
ÂÂÂÂÂ
Panel cut drawing Weight: 2 kg
Fig. 2 (q) External dimensions of separate type 9.5″ LCD unit (monochrome STN)
351
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
CAUTION
TURN MAIN LINE SWITCH OFF BEFORE HANDLING TB1 OR
TB2
Max. 155
Max. 175
Weight: 14 kg
Unit: mm
Fig. 3 (a) External view of control transformer (A80L–0001–0176)
352
Specification of control transformer

(1) Primary side rated voltage
AC200V/220V/230V/380V/415V/440V/460V/480V/550V
(2) Voltage fluctuation
Primary side rated voltage ±15%
(3) Frequency
50Hz/60Hz±3Hz
(4) Secondary side line voltage
See the figure below.
(5) Secondary side voltage deviation
Less than ±3%
(6) Secondary side voltage regulation
Less than 7%
(7) Transformer ambient temperature and humidity
–5°C+60°C 10 to 95% (Relative humidity)
TB1
Â
Â
Â
550
Â
480
460
440
Â
ÂÂ 415
Â
380
Â TB1
240
Â Â
230
Â ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ Â
200A
220
ÂÂÂÂ
200 to 550V 200
Â ÂÂÂ
Â ÂÂÂ
200V
5A
ÂÂ ÂÂ
ÂÂ Â ÂÂ
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂ
100V 100A
Â Â ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
1A
COM 200B
Â ÂÂ 100B
ÂÂ
Fig. 3 (b) Description of control transformer
353
Connector
Note: Mechanical specifications of the position coder are as follows:

(1) Input axis inertia
1.0 × 10–3 kg·cm·sec2 or less
(2) Input axis starting torque
1000 g·cm or less
(3) Input axis permissible loads
Radial Thrust
Operation 1 kg or less 1 kg or less
Idle 20 kg or less 10 kg or less
Attach a pulley directly to the position coder shaft and drive the
timing belt. Confirm that the loads conform with the above
allowable value.
(4) Weight: 1 kg or less
Unit: mm
Fig. 4 (a) External view of position coder A or B A86L–0026–0001#102: Max. 4000 rpm
A86L–0026–0001#002: Max. 6000rpm
354
MS connector: MS3102A–20–29P
Note: Mechanical specifications of the position coder are as follows:

(1) Input axis inertia
1.0 × 10–3 kg·cm·sec2 or less
(2) Input axis starting torque
1000 g·cm or less
(3) Input axis permissible loads
Radial Thrust
Operation 10 kg or less 5 kg or less
Idle 20 kg or less 10 kg or less
Attach a pulley directly to the position coder shaft and drive the
timing belt. Confirm that the loads conform with the above
allowable value.
(4) Weight: Approx. 750 g
Unit: mm
Fig. 4 (b) a External dimensions of position coder A860–0309–T302: Max. 10,000 rpm
355
3 holes equally spaced on a 72 dia
M3 screw terminal
Fig. 5(a) External view of manual pulse generator

A860–0202–T001
356
(1) A860–0202–T004 to T009
M3 screw terminal
M3 screw terminal
(2) A860–0202–T010 to T015
M3 screw terminal
M3 screw terminal
Fig. 5 (b) External view of pendant type manual pulse generator

A860–0202–T004 to T015
357
Cable length: 1.5 m

Weight: about 12 kg
Unit: mm
Fig. 6 External view of FANUC PPR
358
4-M3
Â
Â
Panel cutout
Â
Â
Connector: PCR-E20FS
PCS-E20LA
Honda Tsushin
Cover:
For crimp terminal M4
Length: 200 mm
for frame grounding

Japan Aviation
Electronic
DBM-25S
Color: P–ME–N1.5–3G
4- f 3.6
Fig. 7 (a) External view of punch panel (CE marking non–compliant)
NOTE
A ground terminal is required near the punch panel for connecting with the frame ground.
359
Paint masking area on punch panel side
Panel cutout
M4 for frame grounding
For crimp terminal
PCS-E20LA
Length: 200 mm
Honda Tsushin
Cover:
Japan Aviation Electronic

4- f 3.6
DBM-25S
External dimensions of wide type
Fig. 7 (b) External dimensions of punch panel (CE marking compliant)
NOTE
1 The touch panel has been designed so that its cover can be locked with screws to ensure dust–
and water–proofing.
2 To comply with EMC directives and safety standards, the locker attached to the touch panel
must be electrically connected. So, the edge of the touch panel PCB has been masked with
a paint band to make it electrically conductive.
3 When the touch panel is used as a CE marking compliant product, mask the touch panel on the
locker side to make it electrically conductive. Use conductive packing when attach the touch panel.
4 A ground terminal is required near the punch panel for connecting with the frame ground.
360
Paint masking area on punch panel side
Panel cutout
M4 for frame grounding
For crimp terminal
PCS-E20LA
Length: 200 mm
Honda Tsushin
Cover:
Japan Aviation Electronic

External dimensions of thin type
DBM-25S
Fig. 7 (c) External dimensions of punch panel (CE marking compliant)
NOTE
1 The touch panel has been designed so that its cover can be locked with screws to ensure dust–
and water–proofing.
2 To comply with EMC directives and safety standards, the locker attached to the touch panel
must be electrically connected. So, the edge of the touch panel PCB has been masked with
a paint band to make it electrically conductive.
3 When the touch panel is used as a CE marking compliant product, mask the touch panel on the
locker side to make it electrically conductive. Use conductive packing when attach the touch panel.
4 A ground terminal is required near the punch panel for connecting with the frame ground.
361
Fig. 8 External view of floppy cassette adapter
362
Cable length: 3.0 mm

Weight: 1.4 kg
Unit: mm
Fig. 9 External view of FANUC Handy File
363
Paint: Munsell No. 5GY3.5/0.5 leather tone finish

Weight: About 15 kg
Fig. 10 External view of portable tape reader
364
AUTO
RELEASE
MANUAL
Wiring screw M3 × 6
Power
terminal strip
View from
Signal cable f
arrow A Cable holder
4– f 5.3
Signal cable connector
(Panel installation hole

layout diagram)
Coating Color: Metallic silver

Weight: 6 kg
Unit: mm
Fig. 11 External view of tape reader without reels (serial interface)
NOTE
Install the tape reader, from the rear side of panel with holes and secure with screws and nuts.
If this is not convenient, attach a M5 stud in f 5.3 hole and secure with a nut.
296
AUTO
REEL ON
ALARM RELEASE
REEL OFF
FORWARD STOP REWIND
View from arrow fA
M5 × 10
Stud
4– f 5.3
RS–232–C
interface connector
Power connector
(Panel installation hole

layout diagram)
Parallel interface
connector
Coating Color: Metallic silver
Weight: 9 kg
Unit: mm
Fig. 12 External view of tape reader with reels
NOTE
Install the tape reader, from the rear side of panel with holes and secure with screws and nuts.
If this is not convenient, attach a M5 stud in f 5.3 hole and secure with a nut.
297
Fig. 13 (a) External view of input unit

(A14B–0076–B001)
298
Fig. 13 (b) External view of input unit (Multiple axis)

(A14B–0076–B401)
299
(AC INPUT)
CPD1 (AC OUTPUT)

Connector arrangement on the PCB
Key location
15B INPUT Unit PCB

F11 (AC INPUT FUSE)
F12 (AC INPUT FUSE)
F13 (DC OUTPUT FUSE)
CPD2A (POWER CONTROL)
CPD2B (POWER CONTROL)
CPD2C (POWER CONTROL)
LED of pilot lamp (Green)
LED of alarm lamp (Red)
Fig. 13 (c) External dimensions of input unit (multi–axis machine)

(A14B–0076–B402)
300
Screw for grounding (M4)

Screw terminal block (M4)
Fig. 13 (d) External view of expanded power input unit

(A14B–0076–B209)
301
TYPE: HONDA PCR–E20FS (SOLDERING TYPE)
USAGE: GENERAL
MATING: HONDA PCS–E20LA (METAL)
HOUSING: HONDA PCS–V20L (PLASTIC)
Display
HONDA
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â A B
Â Â Â Â
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
PCR–E20FS 21.65 11.43
Fig. 14 (a) External view of PCR connector (soldering type)
302
TYPE: HIROSE FI40–2015S
USAGE: PULSE CODER INTERFACE

LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE
MPG INTERFACE
MATING/HOUSING: HIROSE FI–20–CV
Tab for
shield
con-
nec–
tion
Section AA
Fig. 14 (b) External view of FI40 connector
303
TYPE: HONDA PCR–V20LA (for 6 dia. cable)

PCR–V20LB (for 8 dia. cable)
USAGE: GENERAL

Case
Cable clamp
Lock bracket
Lock lever
Set screw for cable clamp
Fig. 15 (a) External view of connector case (HONDA, PCR type)
304
TYPE: HIROSE FI–20–CV2
USAGE: GENERAL
Case
Cable clamp
Lock bracket
Lock lever

Fig. 15 (b) External view of connector case (HIROSE FI–20–CV2 type)
305
TYPE: FUJITSU FCN–240C 20–Y/S (for 5.8 dia. cable)
USAGE: GENERAL
Cable clamp
Screw
Lock lever
Fig. 15 (c) External view of connector case (FUJITSU, FCN type)
306
TYPE: HIROSE FI–20–CV
USAGE: PULSE CODER INTERFACE

LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE
MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR INTERFACE
Case
Lock bracket
Lock lever
Cable clamp

Fig. 15 (d) External view of connector case (HIROSE FI–20–CV type)
307
TYPE: AMP 1–178128–3
USAGE: 3 G
POWER SUPPLY UNIT CP1
200VAC INPUT 2 S
1 R Key location
3 G
200VAC OUTPUT CP2 2 200B
1 200A
3 G
10I LCD/MDI UNIT CP11
2 200B
1 200A
Circuit No.
Circuit No.
Fig. 16 (a) External view of AMP connector (1–178128–3)
308
TYPE: AMP 2–178129–6
USAGE: B3 FB A3 COM
ON/OFF CONTROL B2 FA A2 OFF
B1 AL A1 ON
Circuit No.
Circuit No.
Fig. 16 (b) External view of AMP connector (2–178129–6)
309
TYPE: AMP 2–178288–3
USAGE: 3
+24V OUTPUT 2 0V
1 +24V
Circuit No.
Circuit No.
Fig. 16 (c) External view of AMP connector (2–178288–3)
310
TYPE: AMP 1–178288–3
USAGE: 3
+24E OUTPUT 2 0V
1 +24E
Circuit No.
Circuit No.
Fig. 16 (d) External view of AMP connector (1–178288–3)
311
TYPE: AMP 1–175218–2 (Gold coated)

AMP 1–175218–5 (Tin coated)
Reel: AMP 1–175196–2 (Gold coated)

AMP 1–175196–5 (Tin coated)
WIRE: AWG 16, 18, 20
In case of reel
PLATING ID–MARK
PRESSER ID–MARK
Fig. 16 (e) External view of AMP connector (1–175196–2/–5, 175218–2/–5)
312
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Symbol
ÂÂÂÂÂ Number of
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
A (B) C (D)
Specification terminals
MR–20LMH (Plug)
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
39.3 44.9 39.8 17 20
MR–20LFH (Jack)
MR–50LMH (Plug)
67.9 73.5 44.8 18 50
MR–50LFH (Jack)
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Symbol Name Outer diameter of the cable
MR–20L dia. 10 mm
1 Connector cover max
ME–50L dia. 16 mm max
2 Cable clamp
3 Stopper
4 Screw for cable clamp
Plug (MR–20, 50MH)
5
Jack (MR–20, 50FH)
Fig. 17 (a) External view of HONDA connector (case)
313
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Number of
A B
terminals
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
MR–20RHF 32.8 27.8 20
MR–50RHF
ÂÂÂÂÂ 61.4 56.4 50
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Symbol Name
1 Cable clamp
Screw 2.6 dia. ×8
2
3 Connector (MR–20, 50FH)
Fig. 17 (b) External view of HONDA connector (female)
314
Number of
A B
terminals
MR–20RMH 32.8 27.8 20
MR–50RMH 61.4 56.4 50
Symbol Name
1 Cable clamp
2 Screw 2.6 dia. ×8
3 Connector (MR–20, 50FH)
Fig. 17 (c) External view of HONDA connector (male)
315
MR–50MH
(50–core, plug)
MR–50FH
(50–core, plug)
MR–20MH
(20–core, plug)
MR–20FH
(20–core, plug)
Fig. 17 (d) External view of HONDA connector (terminal layout)
316
Manufacturer: FCI Japan
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Specification
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Name (Connector maker Remarks
number)
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Connector housing for cable
SMS3PK–5 Black
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
(Crimp type) RC16M–23T3 For details on tools required
for crimp terminals, contact
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Contact
(Solder type) RC16M–SCT3 the manufacturer.
Cables: Cross sectional area: 0.75 mm2 (30/0.18)

Insulation diameter: 2.8 mm max
Peeling length: 7.2 mm
Fig. 18 (a) External view of connector made by FCI Japan (3 pins, black)
317
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Specification
number)
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Connector housing for cable SMS3PNS–5 Brown
Contact

Fig. 18 (b) External view of connector made by FCI Japan (3 pins, brown)
318
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Specification
number)
Connector housing for cable SMS3PWS–5 White
(Crimp type) RC16M–23D28 For details on tools required
Contact
the manufacturer.

Fig. 18 (c) External view of connector made by FCI Japan (3 pins, white)
319
Specification
Name Remarks
(Connector maker
number)
Connector housing for cable SMS6PN–5 Brown
Contact for crimp terminals, contact

Fig. 18 (d) External view of connector made by FCI Japan (6 pins, brown)
320
Name
Specification
(Connector maker Remarks
number)
Connector housing for cable SMS6PW–5 White
Contact for crimp terminals, contact
the manufacturer.

Fig. 18 (e) External view of connector made by FCI Japan (6 pins, white)
321
A 53.0 D 17.8 G 10.7

B 38.3 E 12.6 H 11.2
C 47.0 F 41.3 J 10.8
A–A
cross section
2–3.05 f
Fig. 19 (a) External view of reader puncher panel connector
Interlock Small round

M2.6 × P0.45 screw screw head screw
1.2 groove
Spring washer
Fig. 19 (b) External view of reader puncher connector metal fitting for lock
Color: Cream
Fig. 20 External view of power receptacle for portable tape reader
NOTE
When connecting with crimp terminal, use M4 terminal (all 3 poles)
322
Minus polarity indication

4–M4 counter sinking Plus polarity indication
Plus terminal with

3–M3 screw holes
Minus terminal with

3–M3 screw holes
4–f 4.3 Mounting holes
Arrow view A
Fig. 21 External view of battery case for absolute pulse coder
323
Fig. 22 External View of the Extension Adaptor Unit for Series 15–B (MMC–II)
NOTE
1 This unit is not dustproof.
2 Ambient temperature during operation: 0°C to 40°C
3 Weight: 1 kg
Tilt mechanism
Fig. 23 External View of the Keyboard for Series 15–B (MMC–II)
NOTE
1 This unit is not dustproof.
2 A 0.6–m signal cable is attached.
4 Weight: 2.5 kg
324
Air flow
2–f 5.8
Fig. 24 External view of the hard disk unit for Series 15–B (MMC–II)
NOTE
1 This is not dustproof type. Build in to the magnetics cabinet of an enclosed structure together
with the control unit.
2 Ambient temperature at operation: 5°C to 55°C
3 Other environmental conditions are the same as in the control unit.
4 Install in the direction of the air flow being upward as shown in the diagram above. Do not install
in the direction of the air flow being sideways.
5 Weight: 3.5 kg
325
Fig. 25 External view of the Portable 5″ Floppy Disk Unit for Series 15–B (MMC–II)
NOTE
1 This unit is not dustproof. Use this unit exclusively for program development.
3 Purchase the floppy disk unit, 1.5–m signal cable and 1.6–m power supply cable from FANUC.
(A08B–0047–K822)
4 Weight: 6 kg
326
Fig. 26 External view of the Portable 3.5″ Floppy Disk Unit for Series 15–B (MMC–II)
NOTE
1 This unit is not dustproof. It should be used for program development only.
2 Maintain an operating ambient temperature range of 5°C to 35°C.
3 The floppy disk unit, and the 1.5–m signal cable and 1.5–m power cable are to be purchased
from FANUC. (A08B–0047–K822)
4 Weight: 3.5 kg
327
Fig. 27 External view of the Portable Cassette Streamer Unit for Series 15–B (MMC–II) (A08B–0047–C071)
328
C. 20-PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS
B–62073E/04 APPENDIX AND CABLES
C ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES
(1) Connector for the PC board
Model: PCR–EV20MDT manufactured by Honda Tsushin
The connector for the PC board has been specially developed support
FANUC’s high–mounting density. The one of each maker’s including
PCR connectors made by Honda Tsushin are compatible with the
mating part of the connector and can be selected for the cable
connection.
(2) Cable connector
The cable connector is separated into a body and a housing. The
connectors available are shown below. Models marked with (*) have
been customized for FANUC; those not so marked are mass produced
as standard products.
Connector Case model Applicable

Use Type Manufacturer model name name cable O.D.
Cable General– Connector HONDA PCR–E20FA PCR–V20LA* f 6mmf (5.7 to 6.5)f

connector purpose body Tsushin PCS–E20LA 6mmf (5.7 to 6.5)
MDI,
IOLINK,
HIROSE FI30–20S* FI–20–CV2* f 6.2mm (f 5.5 to 6.5)
AMP,
Electric
SPDL
FUJITSU FCN–247J020 FCN–240C020 f 5.8mm (f 5.7 to 6.5)
–G/E –Y/S*
Mores 52622–2011* 52624–2015* f 6.2mm (f 5.9 to 6.5)
Housing HONDA PCR–E20FS PCR–V20LA* f 6mm (f 5.7 to 6.5)
Tsushin PCS–E20LA f 6mm (f 5.7 to 6.5)
HIROSE FI40–20S* FI–20–CV2* f 6.2mm (f 5.5 to 6.5)

Electric FI40B–20S* FI–20–CV5* f 9.2mm (f 8.9 to 9.5)
(FI40A–20S*)
FI40B–20S* FI–20–CV6* f 10.25mm (f 9.5 to 11.0)
Pulse coder, Housing HIROSE FI40B–2015S* FI–20–CV* f 8.5mm (f 8.0 to 9.0)

coaxial cables, Electric (FI40–2015S*)
linear scale,
manual pulse FI40B–20S* FI–20–CV5* f 9.2mm (f 8.9 to 9.5)
generator (FI40A–20S*)
FI40B–20S* FI–20–CV6* f 10.25mm (f 9.5 to 11.0)
HONDA PCR–E20FS PCR–V20LA* f 6mm (f 5.7 to 6.5)

Tsushin PCS–E20LA f 6mm (f 5.7 to 6.5)
Fig. C (a) Cable connectors
NOTE
Use the same maker’s connector body and housing to
combine them.
365
AND CABLES APPENDIX B–62073E/04
(3) Required tools for Connection of cable connector

(a) Separate–wire press–mount type
Connector: PCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin)
28–AWG wires are assembled at a time. Generally, it is much more
cost effective to assemble a cable this way than by using solder or
press–mount type connectors. Inquire the each connector maker about
the connection tools.
(b) Solder type
Connector: PCR–E20FS (Honda Tsushin) or
FI40–2015S (Hirose)
Wires of 20 AWG or smaller can be soldered to the Honda Tsushin
connector. However, soldering many of these wires together lowers
work efficiency because the pitch of the soldering portion of the
connector is too small to support it.
To increase work efficiency Hirose has developed a new connector.
By thinning out the number of pins, its soldering portion has a pitch
equal to that of the conventional Honda MF connectors. The
FI40–2015S can be used for interfacing pulse coders and manual pulse
generators which require wires up to as 20 AWG thick for connection
with a +5 V power source.
The following table describes the details of soldered connectors and
cases.
Table C (a) Details of soldered connectors and cases.
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â Â
D Connector
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
Connector model (manufacturer)
Â
PCR–E20FS (HONDA Tsushin)
Â
Â
Description
Soldered connector for general–purpose applications compatible with small–lot
Â
Â
cable assemblies and cable assemblies at the site.
ÂÂ
FI4–20S (HIROSE Electric)
Â
HONDA Tsushin PCR–E20FS or equivalent product
Â Â
ÂÂ Â Â
FI40B–20S (HIROSE Electric) This connector has the same number of pins as the FI40–20S, and has a wider row
(previously FI40A–20S) alignment at its soldering section for facilitating soldering which makes it more
Â Â
Â Â
suitable for soldering thick electrical leads. This connector features higher terminal
Â
strength over the FI40A–20S (suitable for soldering electrical leads up to #20AWG
thick) and is suitable for electrical leads up to #17AWG thick. Note, however, that
Â Â Â
when thick electrical leads such as #17AWG are used, we recommend using higher
ÂÂ
Â
strength case such as the FI–20–CV6.
Â
FI40B–2015S (HIROSE Electric)
Â
This connector utilizes the space obtained by skipping some of the pins to produce
ÂÂ Â Â
(previously FI40A–2015S) a wider pitch at the soldering section. The FI40B–2015S is an improved version of
the F140–2015S, and features higher terminal strength. This allows electrical leads
Â Â
up to #17AWG in cables having an outside diameter of up to 8.5 mm to be partially
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â Â
soldered.
D Case
Â
Â
Â
Â
Case model (manufacturer) Description
Â Â
FI–20–CV5 (HIROSE Electric)
Â
This plastic case is recommended for the FI40B–20S, and is suitable for cables up
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
to outside diameter 9.2 mm.
ÂÂ Â
FI–20–CV6 (HIROSE Electric)
Â Â
This die–cast metal case has been developed for the FI40B–20S, and is suitable for
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
thick cables up to outside diameter 10.25 mm.
366
When cases and soldered connectors made by HIROSE Electric are used
in combination, you can select combinations shown in the figure below
in addition to those describes in Figure C(a). However, the outside
diameter of cables used must be compatible with the applicable outsider
diameter of the case.
Connector model
⋅ FI40B–2015S
(previously FI40–2015S)
Â Â Case model (applicable cable O.D.)
⋅ FI–20–CV (f 8.5 mm dia.) only compatible
FI40–20S
FI40B–20S
(previously FI40A–20S)
Â Â FI–20–CV2 (f 6.2 mm)
FI–20–CV5 (f 9.2 mm)
FI–20–CV6 (f 10.25 mm)
These connectors and
cases are mutually
compatible.
(4) Recommended connectors, compatible housings and compatible

cables
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂ
Table C (b) List of recommended connectors, compatible housings and compatible cables
Â Â Â Â Â Â Compatible cable
Â Â Â Â Â Â
FANUC
FANUC authorized (cable O.D.)
Â Â Â Â Â Â
Name of connector in authorized
connector FANUC developed Remarks
connection manual housing (=case)
(manufacturer)
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂ
Â
product
(manufacturer)
FANUC specification No.
Â Â
Â Â
Â Â
Â Â
Â Â
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ ÂÂÂÂ
PCR–E20FA FCR–E20FA PCR–V20AL A66L–0001–0284#10P Plastic
Connector body (HONDA Tsushin) (HONDA Tsushin) (O.D. 6.2 mm dia.)
Â Â Â Â Â Â
ÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂ
Â
PCS–E20LA Metal
(HONDA Tsushin)
Â Â Â Â Â
FI30–20S FI–20–CV2 Plastic
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â Â Â
ÂÂÂÂ
(HIROSE Electric) (HIROSE Electric)
Â Â Â Â Â Â
FCN–247J020–G/E FCN–240C020–Y/ Plastic
Â Â Â Â Â Â
(FUJITSU Takamisawa) S (FUJITSU
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â Â Â
ÂÂÂÂ
Takamisawa)
Â Â Â Â Â Â
52622–2011 52624–2015 Plastic
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂ
Â Â
(Morex) (Morex)
PCR–E20FS
Â Â ÂFCR–E20FS
Â PCR–V20LA Plastic
ÂÂ Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂ
Â
Housing (HONDA Tsushin) (HONDA Tsushin)
Â Â Â Â Â PCS–E20LA Metal
ÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂ
Â
(HONDA Tsushin)
Â Â Â Â Â
FI40–20S FI–20–CV2 Plastic
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂ
(HIROSE Electric) (HIROSE Electric)
Â
FI40B–2015S
Â Â Â Â Â
FI40B–2015S FI–20–CV A66L–0001–0286 (Note) Plastic
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂ
(previously FI40–2015S) (previously FI40–2015S) (HIROSE Electric) A66L–0001–0402 (Note)
15–pin soldered type (HIROSE Electric) (O.D. 8.5 mm dia.)
ÂÂ
FI40B–20S
Â
Â
Â
Â Â
Â Â
Â
FI40B–20S
Â
Â
FI–20–CV5
(HIROSE Electric)
A66L–0001–0367
A66L–0001–0368
Plastic
Housing
Â Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂ
(HIROSE Electric) (O.D. 9.2 mm dia.)
ÂÂ Â
Â Â
Â Â
Â Â
FI40B–20S
Â ÂÂ FI–20–CV6 A66L–0001–0403 (Note) Metal
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
(HIROSE Electric) (HIROSE Electric) (O.D. 9.8 mm dia.)
367
NOTE
Up till now we have recommend using pulse coder cable (A66L–0001–0286) up to 20 m in
length. We have developed two new cables: A66L–0001–0402 that can be used up to 30 m,
and A66L–0001–0403 that can be used up to 50 m. (For detailed specifications, see Figure 4.)
These cables (A66L–0001–0402 and A66L–0001–0403) not only demonstrate the same oil
resistance as cable A66L–0001–0286, they are also bend–resistant (100 mm dia. cables can
be bent up to one million operations), and comply with UL and CSA standards.
(5) Cable wires

Cable wires generally need to be developed or ordered by the machine
tool builder for the Series 15–B/16/18.
FANUC has developed wires that specifically suit the interface
connector of the Series 15–B/16/18. They are listed in the table below,
for your convenience when ordering from the manufacturer.
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
(In addition to these, a cable for moving parts is under development.)
Â Â
Cable type
Â Â Â
Use
Â Â Structure FANUC Manufac–turer Remarks
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
specification No.
10–pair cable
Â Â Â
General purpose
Â Â
Ten 0.08–mm2 A66L–0001–0284#10P Hitachi Cable,
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
pairs Oki Electric Cable
6–core coaxial
Â Â Â
CRT interface
Â Â
Coaxial six A66L–0001–0296 Hitachi Cable 50 m maximum
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
cable cores
Â
Composite
Â Â Â Â Â Â
Pulse coders, linear Six 0.5–mm2 A66L–0001–0286 Hitachi Cable, 20 m maximum
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂ
12–core cable scales, and manual wires and three Oki Electric Cable (Note 2)
0.18–mm2 pairs
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂ
(Note 2) pulse generators
NOTE
For the pulse coder, scale, and manual pulse generator, each of which has a +5–V power
supply, wires need to be selected taking into consideration the supply voltage drop caused by
the resistance of the cable.
A66L–0001–0286 has been designed for use with a cable length of 20 mm or less. If the cable
length exceeds 20 m, connect A66L–0001–0286 to a cable with a lower resistance, such as
A66L–0001–0157.
The number of manual pulse generators to be connected is assumed to be three. If only one
generator is connected, the cable can be extended to a maximum of 50 m by connecting wires
with in parallel a cross–sectional area of 0.5 mm2 for the power supply.
368
(6) 10–pair cable
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â Â
(a) Specifications
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Item
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂ
Â Unit Specifications
Â Â Â
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂ Â
Product No. — A66L–0001–0284#10P
Â Â Â Â
Manufacturer — Hitachi Cable, Ltd.
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
Â Â Â
Rating — 60_C 30 V: UL2789
80_C 30 V: UL80276
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂ Â
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂ Â
Material Conductor — Stranded wire of tinned annealed copper (ASTM B–286)
Â Â Â Â
Insulator
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ — Cross–linked vinyl
ÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂ
Shield braid
Â — Tinned annealed copper wire
Â Â Â Â
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂ Â
Sheath — Heat–resistant oilproof vinyl
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂ Â
Number of pairs Pairs 10
ÂÂ
Conductor
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
Size
Â
Â AWG 28
Â Â Â Â
ÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
Structure Conductors/ 7/0.127
mm
Â Â Â
Outside diameter
Â mm 0.38
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂ Â
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂ Â
Insulator Thickness mm 0.1
Thinnest portion: 008 (3.1 mm)
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
Outside diameter mm 0.58
(approx.)
Â Â Â Â
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂ Â
Core style (rating) mm UL1571 (80_C, 30V)
Â
Twisted pair
Â Â Â
Outside diameter
Â mm 1.16
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
(approx.)
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂ
Pitch
Â Â mm 20 or less
Lay
Â Â Â Â — Collect the required number of twisted pairs into a cable, then
Â Â Â Â
wrap binding tape around the cable. To make the cable round,
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â Â
apply a cable separator as required.
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
Lay diameter (approx.) mm 3.5
Drain wire
Â Â Â
Conductors/ Hitachi Cable: Not available
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
mm Oki Electric Cable: Available, 10/0.12
Shield braid
Â Â Â
Element wire
Â mm 0.12
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂ Â
diameter
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂ
Braid density
Â % 85 or more
Sheath
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂ
Color
Â Â — Black
Â Â Â Â Â
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂ Â
Thickness mm 1.0
Â Â
Â Â Â
Outside diameter
Â mm 6.2
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂ Â
(approx.)
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂ Â
Standard length m 200
369
Â Â
Â Â Â Â
Item Unit Specifications
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Packing method
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂ
Â — Bundle
Electrical
Â Â Â Electric
Â W/km 233 or less
Â
performance
Â Â Â resistance
Â
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂ Â
(at 20_C)
Â Â Â Â Insulation
Â MW–km 10 or more
ÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
resistance
(at 20_C)
Â Â Â Â
ÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
Dielectric strength V/min. 300
(AC)
Â Â
Â Â Â
Flame resistance — Shall pass flame resistance test VW–1SC of UL standards.
(b) Indications on the cable

On the surface of the cable, print in indelible ink the UL–certified
component classification mark, UL style no., manufacturer’s
name, and flame resistance mark.
(c) Cable structure
Wire identification table (Hitachi)
ÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Insulator color
Wire No.
Â ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
First wire Second wire
1
Â ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
10 2 Twisted–pair wire 1 Blue White
5 2 Yellow White
Binding tape 3 Green White
ÂÂ ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
9 3
Shield braid 4 Red White
6
8 4 5 Purple White
Sheath
6 Blue Brown
7
7 Yellow Brown
8 Green Brown
9 Red Brown
10 Purple Brown
The numbers assigned to the wires correspond to the number in the table at right.
Fig. C (b) Cable made by Hitachi Cable
370
ÂÂ ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂ ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Dot mark
Insula-
color
Dot
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Drain wire Pair tor mark
No.
Â ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
color (1 pitch) First Second
1
Â ÂÂ ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
10 2 wire wire
Twisted–pair wire
Â
ÂÂ ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
6 Binding tape 1 Orange – Red Black
ÂÂ ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
9 3
Shield braid 2 Gray – Red Black
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
7 3 White – Red Black
Sheath
8 4
4 Yellow – Red Black
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
5 5 Pink – Red Black
6 Orange –– Red Black
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
7
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Gray –– Red Black
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
8
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
White –– Red Black
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
9
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Yellow –– Red Black
ÂÂ ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
10
The numbers assigned to the wires correspond to the number in the table at right.
Pink –– Red Black
Fig. C (c) Cable made by Hitachi Cable
(7) Composite 12–core cable
Â Â
Â (a) Specifications
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂ Â
Â
ÂÂÂÂ
Â Â
Â
ÂÂÂÂ
Â Â
Product No. — A66L–0001–0286
Â
Manufacturer
Â Â Â — Oki Cable, Ltd.
Â
ÂÂÂÂ
Â Â
Hitachi Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂ
Â
Â
Rating — 80°C, 30 V
Material
Â Â Â Conductor,
Â — Strand wire of tinned annealed copper (JIS C 3152)
ÂÂ Â Â Â Â
braid–shielded
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂ Â
wire, drain wire
Â Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂ Â
Insulator — Heat–resistant flame–retardant vinyl
ÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂ
Â
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Sheath
Â — Oilproof, heat–resistant, flame–retardant vinyl
Â Â
Number of wires (wire nos.)
Â Â Cores 6 (1 to 6) 6 (three pairs) (7 to 9)
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
Conductor Size mm2 0.5 0.18
Â Â Â Â Â
Structure
Â Conductors/ 20/0.18 7/0.18
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
mm
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
Outside diameter mm 0.94 0.54
ÂÂ
Insulator
Â
Â Â
Â Â Â Â
Standard thickness mm 0.25 0.2
Â Â
Â Â
(The minimum
Â Â Â Â Â
thickness is at least
80% of the standard
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
thickness.)
Â Â ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂ Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Outside diameter mm 1.50 0.94
371
Â Â
Â Â Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â Â Â Â
Â
Â
Twisted pair
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Outside diameter
Â mm 1.88
ÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Direction of lay
Â Â Â Â
Â
— Left
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â Â
Â ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂ Â
Pitch mm 20 or less
Lay
Â Â Â Â — Twist the wires at an appropriate pitch so the outermost layer is
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
right–twisted, and wrap tape around the outermost layer. Apply a
cable separator as required.
Â Â Â
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂ Â
Lay diameter mm 5.7
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂ Â
Drain wire Size mm2 0.3
Â Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂ Â
Structure Wires/mm 12/0.18
Â Â Â Â Â
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
Outside diameter mm 0.72
Â Â Â Â
Shield braid Element wire mm 0.12
diameter
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂ Â
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂ Â
Thickness mm 0.3
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂ
Braid density
Â % 70
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂ
Outside diameter
Â mm 6.3
Â Â Â Â
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂ Â
Sheath Color — Black
Â Â Â Â Â
Standard thickness mm 1.1
Â Â Â Â Â
(The minimum
thickness is at least
ÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
85% of the standard
thickness.)
Â
Â Â Â Â
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂ Â
Outside diameter mm 8.5 Max. 9.0 (Note)
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂ Â
Standard length m 100
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Packing method
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â — Bundle
Electrical
Â Â Â
Electric
Â Â Ω/km 39.4 113
ÂÂ
performance
Â
Â Â Â
resistance (at
Â Â Â
Â Â
Â
(1 to 6) (7 to 9)
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
20°C) (wire nos.)
ÂÂ Â
Â Â Â
Insulation
Â Â Â
Â
ΜΩ–km 15
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
resistance (at
20°C)
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂ Â
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
Dielectric strength V/min. 500
(AC)
Â Â Â
Â Â ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂ Â
Flame resistance — Shall pass flame resistance test VW–1SC of UL standards.
NOTE
The maximum outside diameter applies to portions other than the drain wire.
372
(b) Markings on cable

(1) Name or symbol of the manufacturer
(2) Manufacturing year
(c) Cable structure
The cable structure is shown below.
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ Drain wire
Â Red 0.18–mm2 twisted pair wire
Â 6 7
1
ÂÂ
White 0.5–mm2 insulated wire
Red Black
5 Red
2 Binding tape
8
Red Black
Black Shield braid
4 3
Red Black Black Sheath
9
White
The colors in the figure indicate the colors of insulators.
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
Â
Â Â Â
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
Â
Item Specifications
Â
Product No.
Â Â
Â A66L–0001–0402 A66L–0001–0403
ÂÂ
Manufacturer
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â Â
Â
Oki Cable Ltd.
Â Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
A core wire B core wire A core wire B core wire
Â Â Â Â Â Â Â
Conductor Structure 16/0.12 3/22/0.12 16/0.12 7/16/0.12
(0.18 mm2) (0.75 mm2) (0.18 mm2) (1.25 mm2)
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
Conductors/mm
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
O.D. mm 0.55 1.20 0.55 1.70
Â
Insulator
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Color
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â white, red, black red, black white, red, black red, black
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
(polyester)
Thickness mm 0.16 0.23 0.16 0.25
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
Outside diameter 0.87 1.66 0.87 2.20
mm
ÂÂ ÂÂ Â Â Â Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â Â Â Â
Twisted pair Structure white×red, white×red,
white×black, white×black,
Â Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â black×red black×red
ÂÂ ÂÂ Â
Â Â Â Â
Direction of lay
Â Â Â
Â
Left Left
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ ÂÂÂÂÂÂ Pitch typ. 20 mm Pitch typ. 20 mm
373
Â
Â Â Â
Â
Item Specifications
Â
Product No.
Â Â
Â A66L–0001–0402 A66L–0001–0403
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Manufacturer
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
Oki Cable Ltd.
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â Â
Â
Lay Number of wires 3 pairs 6 cores 3 pairs 6 cores
ÂÂ ÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
Direction of lay
Taping
Â Â
Â Â
Â
Left
Tape the outermost layer with

Left
Tape the outermost layer with
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂJapanese paper after twisting. Japanese paper after twisting.
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ ÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
O.D.
Â Â
standard mm
Â 5.7 6.9
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
Â Â Â
Shield braid Element wire diameter 0.14
standard mm
Â Â Â Â
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
Â
Thickness standard mm 80
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
Â
Drain Wrap one wire set comprising 12/0.8 mm under the shield braid.
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
O.D.
Â Â
standard mm
Â 6.4 7.6
ÂÂ
Sheath
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Color
Â
Â Black (matte)
(polyester)
Â Â Â
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â Â
Â
Thickness standard mm 1.05 1.1
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
Diagonal taping
Â
Â Â Diagonally wrap Japanese paper tape underneath the sheath.
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
O.D.
Â
mm
Â 8.5" 0.3 9.8" 0.3
Â Â Â Â
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
Â
Completed Standard length m 100
product
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
Â
Short length In principle, not recognized as a completed product.
Â
Performance of
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Rating
Â
Â 80°C 30 V
Â Â Â Â
completed
product Standard Must comply with UL STYLE 20236 and CSA LL43109 AWM I/II A 80°C30V
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
Â FT–1
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Fire resistance
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â Must pass VW–1 and FT–1.
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂ ÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â Â Â Â
Â
Electrical Electric resistance 103 max. 25.5 max. 103 max. 15.0 max.
performance W/km (at 20°C)
Â Â
Â ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
Insulation resistance At least 1
MW/km (at 20°C)
Â Â Â Â
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
Dielectric strength V–min A.C 500
.
Â Â Â Â
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
Insulation Tensile strength N/mm2 At least 9.8
performance
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
Elongation % At least 100
Â Â Â
Tensile strength after
Â 70% or more of pre–aging value
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
aging %
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Elongation after aging%
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
Â Â Â Â
Aging conditions 113°C, 168 hours
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
374
Â
Â Â Â
Â
Item Specifications
Â
Product No.
Â Â
Â A66L–0001–0402 A66L–0001–0403
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Manufacturer
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
Â Â
Â
Oki Cable Ltd.
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
Â
Sheath Tensile strength N/mm2 At least 9.8
performance
ÂÂ ÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Elongation
Â
Â
Tensile strength after
%
Â
Â
At least 100
70% or more of pre–aging value
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
aging
Â
%
Â
ÂÂ ÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
Elongation after aging%
Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
Aging conditions 113°C, 168 hours
ÂÂ ÂÂ ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Cable structure
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
Binding tape Shield braid
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
Â ÂÂÂÂ
Â
Pair lead A
ÂÂ ÂÂ ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
Â Â ÂÂÂÂ
Red
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ ÂÂÂÂ
Red
Black
ÂÂ ÂÂ ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂ ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂ ÂÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
Red Black
Red
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
Â Â Â
Â
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
Â Â
Single lead B Black
Red
ÂÂ ÂÂ ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ Â
Drain wire
Â
Sheath
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
375
D. ATTACHING THE CRT
PROTECTIVE COVER APPENDIX B–62073E/04
D ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ATTACHING THE CRT PROTECTIVE COVER
A CRT protective cover must be attached to the 9″ monochrome CRT to
comply with CE marking (machine tool) directives.
The 9″ monochrome CRT is also provided with a protective cover
(specification : A02B–0200–K820) between its top surface and rear
surface.
376
D. ATTACHING THE CRT
B–62073E/04 APPENDIX PROTECTIVE COVER
Bottom cover
Insert under panel.
Attaching the bottom cover (viewed from below)
Insert under panel.
Side cover Insert between panels.
Attaching the side cover (viewed from side)
CRT protective cover
377
B–62073E/04 Index
Numbers¡ Connection between the series 15–B (MMC–II) and peripheral
units, 275
10.4″ LCD display interface (CE marking compliant with Connection diagram, 134
built–in graphic function), 222
Connection diagram for MMC–IV, 92
14″ analog CRT, 10.4″ LCD, 9.5″ LCD display interface (CE
marking compliant when MMC–IV is not used), 218 Connection diagram for series 15–B (in case of MMC–III), 89,
91
14″ analog CRT, 10.4″ LCD, 9.5″ LCD display interface (CE
marking compliant when MMC–IV is used), 220 Connection diagram for series 15–MB or series 150–MB (in
case of multiple axis), 83
20–pin interface connectors and cables, 366
Connection diagram for series 15–TB/TTB/MB (when
9″ CRT or 9″ PDP display interface (CE marking LCD/MDI unit with built–in graphic functions is used), 77
non–compliant), 214
Connection diagram for series
9″ CRT or PDP display interface (CE marking compliant), 216 15–TB/TTB/MB/TFB/TTFB/MFB, series 150–TB/MB/TTB
(in case of analog spindle), 80
15–TB/TTB/MB/TFB/TTFB/MFB, series 150–TB/MB/TTB
(in case of serial spindle), 74
A¡
Action against noise, 30 15–TB/TTB/MB/TFB/TTFB/MFB, series 150–TB/MB/TTB
(when LCD/MDI unit with built–in graphic functions is not
Additional cabinet (in case of analog spindle interface), 86 used), 74
Additional cabinet (in case of serial spindle interface), 85 Connection of FANUC I/O link by electric cable, 125
Address–fixed signals, 207 Connection of FANUC I/O link by optical fiber cable, 126
Adjusting the flat display, 224 Connection of I/O units to machine interface, 120
ALARM LEDs on source output operator’s panel connection Connection of input unit for additional cabinet A, 115
unit, 195
Connection of input unit for standalone cabinet A, 105
Analog spindle interface, 256
Connection of input unit for standalone cabinet B, 110
APC battery interface, 272
Connection of operator’s panel connection unit, 175
Attaching the CRT protective cover, 377
Connection of reference position approach signal, 247
Connection of source output operator’s panel connection unit,
189
B¡ Connection of tape reader with reels, 235
Battery for memory backup, 44 Connection of tape reader without reels, 234
Connection of the FANUC I/O link, 123
Connection of the FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A, 131
Connection pin assignment addresses of source output
C¡ operator’s panel connection unit, 197
Cabinet design and installation conditions of the machine tool Connection to CNC peripherals, 208
magnetic, 10
Connection to control unit, 114
Cabinet exterior environmental requirements, 7
Connection to input unit (A14B–0076–B411), 111
Cabinet lead–in for stand–alone cabinet A, 67
Connection to input units (A14B–0076–B004, –B005, and
Cable clamp and shield processing, 37 –B008), 105
Cable connection [Connection to the input unit Connection to the control unit, 109
(A02B–0075–J141, –J142, –J144, and –J145), 116
Connection with a floppy disk unit for unit FANUC series 15–B
Cable lead–in for additional cabinet A, 69 (MMC–II), 287
Cable lead–in for stand–alone cabinet B, 68 Connection with a hard disk unit for FANUC series 15–B
(MMC–II), 283
Cable lead–in–diagram, 47
Connection with a printer using the centronics interface for
Configuration, 4 FANUC series 15–B (MMC–II), 279
Configuration and installation of the control unit, 40 Connection with an extension adapter unit for FANUC series
15–B (MMC–II), 281
Configuration of control unit connectors, 47
Connection with an external device using the RS–422 interface
Connecting connection unit 1 and connection unit 2, 149 for series 15–B (MMC–II), 277
Connecting input power source, 135 Connection with the FANUC handy file, 233
Connecting signal cables, 138 Connector layout for operator’s panel connection unit, 179
Connecting the connection unit, 147 Connector pin assignment for the connection unit, 154
Connecting the power supply unit, 97 Control unit, 40, 84
Connecting with I/O modules, 141 Cooling by heat exchanger, 13
Connection between the control unit and additional locker, 88 Cooling fin A/B/C, 16
i–1
INDEX B–62073E/04
Correspondence between I/O signals and address in a module, Input signal regulations for the operator’s panel connection
145 unit, 176
CRT/MDI unit interface, 209 Input unit layout, 105, 110, 115
Installation, 6, 24
Installation conditions of the CNC inside cabinet and servo unit,
8
D¡ Installing the heat exchanger, 16
Details of machine side connection of source output operator’s Interface between MMC–III board and option 1 board (video
panel connection unit, 199 signal), 228
Details of the connection between the connection unit and the Interface between MMC–IV board and option 1 board (video
machine, 156 signal), 225
Details of the connection between the operator’s panel
connection unit and the machine, 181
Digital input/output module, 143
DNC interface, 248
K¡
Keyboard interface, 226
DNC1 interface, 248
DNC2 interface (RS–232–C), 250
DNC2 interface (RS422), 251
L¡
Linear scale interface (A/B/Z signal interface), 269
Linear scale interface (serial interface), 271
E¡
List of external dimensions, 299
Emergency stop signal, 294
Environmental requirements, 7
External dimensions, 302
M¡
External dimensions of source output operator’s panel
connection unit, 206 Maintenance, 27
External view of operator’s panel connection unit, 188 Maintenance area, 70
External view of the connection unit, 174 Maintenance area for additional cabinet A, 72
Maintenance area for self–standing A type cabinet, 70
Maintenance area for self–standing B type cabinet, 71
F¡ Manual pulse generator interface, 238

Mounting and dismounting modules, 132
FANUC cassette connection, 232
N¡
G¡ Noise suppressor, 36
General–purpose analog voltage input interface, 274
Number of I/O points for I/O Unit–MODEL A, 145
Ground, 31
Grounding, 136
Grounding each unit, 33
O¡
Outer dimensions, 132
Outer hard disk interface (MMC–III), 292
H¡ Output signal regulations for the connection unit, 153
Heat exchanger for CRT/MDI unit, 21 Output signal regulations for the operator’s panel connection
unit, 177
Heat loss of each unit, 14
Output signal standard for source output operator’s panel
High–speed DI signal interface, 244 connection unit, 192
Hybrid–control connections, 273
P¡
I¡ Portable tape reader connection, 231
I/O device interface, 229 Power capacity, 9
Input signal regulations for the connection unit, 151 Power OFF sequence, 104
i–2
B–62073E/04 INDEX
Power ON sequence, 104 Servo amp interface, 260

Power supply unit and input unit connection, 94 Servo interface, 259
Power supply unit panel layout, 95 Small 19″ keyboard interface, 227
PPR connection, 230 Source output operator’s panel connection unit input signal
Pulse coder interface, 257 standard, 190
Spindle interface, 252
Structure of FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A, 131
R¡
Remote buffer interface (RS–232–C), 240
Remote buffer interface (RS–422), 242 T¡
Replacing the battery, 45 Temperature rise within the cabinet, 13
RS–232–C serial port, 229 The heat pipe type heat exchanger, 24
RS–232–C serial port (MMC–III), 290 Thermal design of the cabinet, 13
RS–422 serial port, 236 Total connection, 73
S¡ W¡
Separating signal lines, 30
When AC output terminals for which power on/off is controlled
Serial pulse coder interface, 263 are insufficient, 103
Serial spindle interface (α series), 255 When an input unit is not used, 97
Serial spindle interface (S series spindle), 254 When an input unit is used, 100
i–3
Revision Record
FANUC Series 15/150-MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL (B–62073E)
04 Nov., ’98
The following products are added

D FANUC Series 150-TB
03 Feb., ’95 D FANUC Series 150-TTB
D FANUC Series 15-MB
Correction of errors
The following products are added

D FANUC Series 15-TFB
02 Feb., ’94 D FANUC Series 15-TTFB
D FANUC Series 15-MFB
D FANUC Series 15-MB (Multiple axis)
01 Oct., ’92
Edition Date Contents Edition Date Contents

· No part of this manual may be
reproduced in any form.
· All specifications and designs

are subject to change without
notice.

15 CONNECTION HARDWARE 62073e PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

15 CONNECTION HARDWARE 62073e PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

GE Fanuc Automation

Computer Numerical Control Products

Series 15 / 150 – Model B

Connection Manual (Hardware)

GFZ-62073E/04 November 1998

GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory

©Copyright 1998 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

` Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

4.2 CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR SERIES 15–TB/TTB/MB/TFB/TTFB/MFB,

5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND INPUT UNIT CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO MACHINE INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

6.3.9 Digital Input/Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

7.3 MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

8. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

C. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

D. ATTACHING THE CRT PROTECTIVE COVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND INPUT UNIT CONNECTION

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO MACHINE INTERFACE

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

FANUC Series 15–TB 15–TB

FANUC Series 15–TFB 15–TFB

FANUC Series 15TED–MODEL B–4 (*1) 15TED

FANUC Series 15TEE–MODEL B–4 (*1) 15TEE

FANUC Series 15TEF–MODEL B–4 (*1) 15TEF

FANUC Series 15–MB 15–MB Series 15–B

FANUC Series 15–MFB 15–MFB

FANUC Series 15MEK–MODEL B–4 (*1) 15MEK

FANUC Series 15MEL–MODEL B–4 (*1) 15MEL

FANUC Series 15–TTB 15–TTB

FANUC Series 15–TTFB 15–TTFB

FANUC Series 150–TB 150–TB

FANUC Series 150–TTB 150–TTB Series 150–B

FANUC Series 150–MB 150–MB

Manuals related to Manuals related to FANUC Series 15/150–MODEL B are as follows.

List of manuals related to Series 15/150–MODEL B

(6.4, 6.5, 6.6)

In operation 0°C to 45°C 5°C to 40°C

Change in 1.1°C/minute 0.3°C/minute

Relative humidity Relative humidity

In operation 0.5 G or less

Normal machine shop environment

Humidity Relative humidity: 95% or less, no condensation allowed

Vibration In operation: 0.5 G or less

Power capacity of the

3.3 When a cabinet is designed, it must satisfy the environmental conditions

(9) The CRT screen can be distorted by magnetic interference.

6 W/m2/°C 4 m2) 9.1 W/°C+ 33.1 W/°C

See Section 3.5 for installing the heat exchanger.

Control unit Basic unit (4 slots) 60W Power supply AI

Basic unit (4 slots) 80W Power supply BI

Basic unit (6 slots) 80W Power supply BI

Basic unit (8 slots) 80W Power supply BI

Main CPU board 20W

PMC board 18W

Sub board 18W

Option 1 board 15W

RISC Board 18W Cannot be used on

Buffer board (Multiple axis) 6W

AXES CPU (Multiple axis) 15W

MMC–II CPU board 20W Can be used only on series 150–B